JP2016022108A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine in which a manager of a game machine can easily manage information indicating that an illegal act may have been performed.SOLUTION: A sub CPU 401 in a sub control board 400, on the basis of an operation by operation means, transmits game-related information based on error information related to an error generated in a game machine and specific main chip ID information fixed to a main chip which is mounted on a main control board 300, to a performance control board 600. The performance control board 600 outputs the game-related information received from the sub CPU 401 to an outside of the game machine.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 119

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  In addition, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number value for each winning combination. The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the stop button operation by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted to display a plurality of symbol combinations on the active line among predetermined symbol combinations.

  At this time, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols that can receive a privilege is not displayed regardless of the operation of the stop button at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning combination will not be displayed on the active line in combination with the winning combination, or if the stop button is operated at any timing, There is a winning combination in which such a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined as a winning combination that does not stop and display the combination of symbols related to the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do this, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”). ”) Is performed. Here, the “specific state” is a bonus game in which a probability that a combination of symbols from which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “a combination of symbols related to winning a prize”) is displayed on the active line is improved as compared to the normal state. (“RB (regular bonus)”, “BB (big bonus)”, “CB (challenge bonus)”, “MB (middle bonus)”, etc.) If the symbol combination is not displayed (or if the stop button is not operated in the appropriate order, the symbol combination related to the winning combination with the smaller number of medals will be displayed) In addition, “AT (assist time)” that informs the appropriate operation order of the stop button, etc., and operating the start lever without performing the medal insertion operation More re-game the player is started to improve the probability that is determined as a winning combination "RT (replay time)", AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a such as "ART (assisted replay time)". Therefore, the player plays a game while desiring to shift to a specific state advantageous to the player.

  In such gaming machines, fraudulent acts of illegally acquiring game media are constantly occurring, and there are various types of frauds that are performed.

  In response to such an action, Patent Document 1 is configured to output a signal indicating the state to the outside when the setting value set in the gaming machine is changed. The external device that receives the signal grasps whether or not fraud has been performed.

  With such a technology, it is possible to exert a certain deterrent against fraud.

JP 2007-44060 A

  However, in the configuration in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, since it is a configuration in which only the setting value set in the gaming machine is changed, it is difficult for the manager of the gaming machine to manage information. There was a problem.

  In view of such circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which an administrator of a gaming machine can easily manage information indicating that there is a possibility of fraud.

  In order to solve such problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention is advantageous to the player based on the fact that a specific display result is displayed on the symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols. In a gaming machine that shifts to an advantageous gaming state, game control means for controlling a game, unique individual information storage means for storing unique individual information defined in the game control means, error detection means for detecting an error, and An error information storage means for storing the error detected by the error detection means as error information, an operation means for accepting a predetermined operation, and the error information storage means stored based on the operation of the operation means. Game related information for outputting game related information based on the error information and the unique individual information stored in the unique individual information storage means to the outside of the gaming machine. Characterized in that and an output unit.

  A game that controls a game in a gaming machine that shifts to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player based on the fact that a specific display result is displayed on a symbol display means for displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable display and a stop display. Control means, unique individual information storage means for storing unique individual information determined by the game control means, game history information storage means for storing game history information indicating the history of the game, and error detection means for detecting errors An error information storage means for storing the error detected by the error detection means as error information, an operation means for receiving a predetermined operation, and the game history information storage means based on the operation of the operation means. The game history information stored in the error information, the error information stored in the error information storage means, and the unique individual information storage means Code information generating means for generating code information that can be read by a predetermined terminal based on the specific individual information; code information display means for displaying the code information generated by the code information generating means; , Provided.

  Here, the “advantageous game state” may be any game state as long as it is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state. For example, it may be a “bonus game” such as “RB” or “BB” or a “small role assist game” such as “ART” or “AT”.

  Here, as the “game control means”, a main control board, a sub control board, an effect control board, an image control board, an amplifier control board, and the like can be applied. Any substrate can be used as long as it can communicate with other substrates in one direction or in both directions.

  The “unique individual information” corresponds to chip ID information provided in the first control means. The ID information of this chip is composed of a serial number. For example, if there are 10 models of the same gaming machine, each 10 units has a unique ID.

  In addition, “error information” corresponds to all errors when irregularities occur in gaming machines.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it becomes easy for an administrator of the gaming machine to manage information indicating that there is a possibility that fraud has been performed.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the movable aspect of a production | presentation apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of an arrangement | sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "00". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "01". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "02". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "03". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "04". It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for non-RT game states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 1st RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 2nd RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 3RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 4th RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 5RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 6RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of the list of the states managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus state distribution lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a chance state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fake game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the number of games for ART state, and a lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a drawing-back lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game start management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the medal reception start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value display process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the medal management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the medal insertion check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage medal insertion process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the start lever check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel rotation start preparation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop pre-process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process during reel rotation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the payout process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of RT game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the checksum related process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the control command set process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub side checksum command set process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the main board | substrate communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the setting value related command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the payment command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the game state command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving a spinning cylinder related command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of reception of the input / withdrawal related command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of chip ID related command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the presentation related command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of checksum command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the conditional device command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for chance precursor states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus precursor state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for chance states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition sign state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition preparation state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd surrender sign state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd addition preparation state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd addition state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st addition preparation states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd addition preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub control board | substrate communication process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub side control command analysis process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the collation process in an effect control board. It is a conceptual diagram which shows an example of main chip ID in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control command in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control command in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage area of RAM in this embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram which shows an example of the total checksum in this embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram which shows an example of the total checksum in this embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram which shows an example of the checksum value which changes for every game machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between a part of storage data of sub ROM in this embodiment, and a sum value. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub side checksum command transmission order table in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the portable interlocking game start process at the time of the password not acquiring in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a portable interlocking game start process at the time of password acquisition being completed in a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the portable interlocking game completion | finish process in a sub control board. It is a conceptual diagram 1 which shows an example of the portable interlocking game in this embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram 2 which shows an example of the portable interlocking game in this embodiment. It is the conceptual diagram 3 which shows an example of the portable interlocking game in this embodiment. It is the conceptual diagram 4 which shows an example of the portable interlocking game in this embodiment.

(First embodiment)

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of a gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of an internal structure of a cabinet 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the back surface of the front door 3.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. A plurality of components are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. A plurality of components are attached to the front door 3.

(Hinge mechanism 4)
The hinge mechanism 4 is provided on the left side of the cabinet 2 as viewed from the front, and is provided to pivotally support the front door 3 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of the game store performs maintenance work, changes a set value, or the like, the locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. First, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 of the front door 3 and is unlocked by rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Next, the front door 3 is opened, and work such as maintenance work and setting value change is performed. When the maintenance work or the work such as changing the set value is completed, the front door 3 is closed and locked.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 when viewed from the front, and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(BET button 7)
The BET button 7 is provided below a start lamp 24, which will be described later, and is provided to use “1” medals among the stored medals for the game.

(MAXBET button 8)
The MAXBET button 8 is provided on the right side of the BET button 7 when viewed from the front. Among the stored medals, the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game (“1” game or “1” unit game) is played. Is provided for use. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided on the back side of the BET button 7 and is provided for settlement of medals stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided below the BET button 7. The start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 described later starts processing for obtaining a hard random number and rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. The processing to do is performed.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in front view. The left stop button 11 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18 to be described later.

(Intermediate stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 when viewed from the front. Further, the middle stop button 12 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the stop of the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side of the middle stop button 12 when viewed from the front. The right stop button 13 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the rotation of the right reel 20 to be described later.

(Return button 14)
The return button 14 is provided on the right side of the right stop button 13 when viewed from the front. The return button 14 is provided to return a jammed medal when a medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is jammed in a selector 15 described later.

(Selector 15)
The selector 15 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The selector 15 is provided to determine whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate.

(Error cancel sensor 16s)
The error release sensor 16s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to release an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. Here, the error release sensor 16s includes a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and when a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, A locking part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. As a result, the error release sensor 16s detects an error release operation for releasing an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door opening / closing sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to detect whether or not the front door 3 is open. The door opening / closing sensor 17s includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. When a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is locked. The part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. Thereby, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is driven to rotate by a middle stepping motor 152, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Direction button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAXBET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. The effect button 21 is connected to an effect button sensor 710s described later. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 controls the later-described liquid crystal display device 46 and the like via the below-described effect control board 600 when an after-mentioned effect button sensor 710s detects an operation of the effect button 21. .

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side of the effect button 21 when viewed from the front. The cross key 22 includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button, and is provided for a player to operate at a predetermined timing. It has been. In addition, a cross key board 711 described later is connected to the cross key 22. The sub-control board 400 described later controls the liquid crystal display device 46 described later via the effect control board 600 described later when the cross-key board 711 described later detects the operation of the cross key 22.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 can be visually recognized. Is provided to do. Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the middle reel 19, and drawn on the peripheral surface of the right reel 20. A total of “9” symbols of “3” symbols can be viewed through the display window 23.

(Start lamp 24)
The start lamp 24 is provided above the BET button 7 and is provided to notify whether or not the start operation can be received by the start lever 10. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later has a case where the number of medals used in the game is “3” by the operation of the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8, or “3” in the medal slot 6. When a medal is inserted, a start operation is started by the start lever 10 by turning on the start lamp 24 when a combination of symbols related to “replay” to be described later is displayed on the active line in the previous game. To notify that it is possible to accept the message.

(Effective line)
Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Only the “down-right line” connecting the symbols displayed in the lower row with straight lines is the effective line.

  Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, (a) the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. A line obtained by connecting the symbols displayed in the upper line with a straight line is referred to as an “upper line”. (B) The symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. A line connecting the symbols displayed in the middle row with a straight line is referred to as a “middle row”. (C) The symbol displayed in the lower row of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 19, and the right reel A line formed by connecting the symbols displayed in the lower part of the line 20 with a straight line is referred to as a “lower line”. (D) The symbol displayed in the lower part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle part of the middle reel 19, The pattern displayed on the top of the reel 20 is a straight line. The do's line of "upward-sloping line". The effective line may be the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, and the upper right line instead of the lower right line. In addition to the lower right line, the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, and the right line Lines may be applied.

(First BET lamp 25)
The first BET lamp 25 is provided on the right side of the start lamp 24 when viewed from the front, and is provided to notify that the BET number is “1”. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later is configured to bet the BET when “1” or more medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or when “1” or more medals are stored (credit). For example, when the button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is operated, the first BET lamp 25 is turned on.

(Second BET lamp 26)
The second BET lamp 26 is provided above the first BET lamp 25 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “2”. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later is a BET in a case where “2” or more medals are inserted into the medal slot 6 or in a state where “2” or more medals are stored (credit). For example, when the button 7 is operated “2” times, the second BET lamp 26 is turned on.

(3rd BET lamp 27)
The third BET lamp 27 is provided above the second BET lamp 26 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “3”. Specifically, the main control board 300 described later has a MAXBET button when “3” medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or in a state where “3” or more medals are stored (credit). When No. 8 is operated, the third BET lamp 27 is turned on, for example, when a combination of symbols related to “replay” to be described later is displayed on the active line in the previous game.

(Storage number indicator 28)
The stored number indicator 28 is provided on the right side of the first BET lamp 25, the second BET lamp 26, and the third BET lamp 27 as viewed from the front. The stored number display 28 is provided to display the number of stored (credit) medals of the player stored in the gaming machine 1.

(Payout number display 29)
The payout number indicator 29 is provided on the right side of the stored number indicator 28 in front view. The payout number display 29 is provided for displaying the payout number of medals to be paid out according to the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. The payout number display 29 displays that the gaming machine 1 is in an error state when the gaming machine 1 is in an error state.

(Putable indicator lamp 30)
The insertable display lamp 30 is provided on the right side of the payout number indicator 29 in front view. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of turning on the insertable display lamp 30 when accepting the insertion of medals through the medal insertion slot 6. On the other hand, when the medal insertion slot 6 does not accept the insertion of medals, the main control board 300 to be described later performs a process of turning off the insertable display lamp 30. As a result, the player is notified through the medal slot 6 whether or not to accept medal insertion.

(Replay display lamp 31)
The replay display lamp 31 is provided below the throwable display lamp 30. Here, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of turning on the replay display lamp 31 when a combination of symbols related to “replay” described later is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, the main control board 300 described later displays the symbol combination related to “replay” described later on the active line in the next game in which the symbol combination related to “replay” described later is displayed on the active line. If not, processing for turning off the replay display lamp 31 is performed. This notifies that the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line and that the next game can be performed without using a medal.

(Bonus display unit 32)
The Bonus display part 32 is provided on the right side of the display window 23 when viewed from the front. The Bonus display unit 32 is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 becomes a Bonus state, the later-described sub-control board 400 passes through a later-described panel LED relay board 700 and a later-described Bonus display LED board 705. Processing to turn on the LED provided in the Bonus display unit 32 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided on the Bonus display unit 32 via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the Bonus display LED board 705 described later when the Bonus state described below ends. To perform the process. As a result, the player is notified of the transition to the Bonus state and the player is informed that the Bonus state has ended.

(ART display unit 33)
The ART display unit 33 is provided below the Bonus display unit 32. The ART display unit 33 is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 becomes an ART state, the later-described sub-control board 400 passes through a later-described panel LED relay board 700 and an later-described ART display LED board 706. Processing to turn on the LED provided in the ART display unit 33 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided on the ART display unit 33 via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the ART display LED board 706 described later when the ART state described later ends. To perform the process. As a result, the player is notified that the ART state has been entered, and the player has been informed that the ART state has ended.

(RUSH display unit 34)
The RUSH display unit 34 is provided on the left side of the display window 23 when viewed from the front. The RUSH display unit 34 is provided with an LED. Here, the sub-control board 400 described later has a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a RUSH display LED board 707 described below when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 described below becomes the first addition state. The process of turning on the LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34 is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 described later is an LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34 via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a RUSH display LED board 707 described later when the first addition state described below is completed. The process to turn off is performed. Thus, the player is notified that the player has shifted to the first added state and that the first added state has been completed to the player.

(Stop button operation display unit 35)
The stop button operation display unit 35 is provided below the RUSH display unit 34. (a) A left stop button operation display unit 35L that emits light at a timing when it is optimal to operate the left stop button 11, and (b) ) Middle stop button operation display unit 35C that emits light at a timing when it is optimal to operate the middle stop button 12, and (c) Right stop button operation display that emits light at a timing that is optimal to operate the right stop button 13 35R, and is provided to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Each of the left stop button operation display unit 35L, the middle stop button operation display unit 35C, and the right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided with an LED.

(Left stop button operation display part 35L)
The left stop button operation display part 35L is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 is the ART state, when the operation of the left stop button 11 is the optimal timing, the later-described sub-control board 400 is described later. A process of turning on an LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 to be described later performs a process of turning on the LED provided in the left stop button operation display unit 35L in the ART state to be described later, and then when the operation of the left stop button 11 is performed. Then, a process of turning off the LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. This notifies that it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11.

(Intermediate stop button operation display part 35C)
The middle stop button operation display section 35C is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the middle stop button 12. Here, when a state managed by the sub-control board 400 to be described later is the ART state, the sub-control board 400 to be described later will be described later when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is the optimal timing. A process of turning on an LED provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 described later performs the process of turning on the LED provided in the middle stop button operation display unit 35C in the later-described ART state, and then the operation of the middle stop button 12 is performed. Then, a process of turning off the LED provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. This notifies that it is the optimal timing to operate the middle stop button 12.

(Right stop button operation display part 35R)
The right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided to notify that it is an optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13. Here, when a state managed by the below-described sub control board 400 is an ART state, when the right control button 400 is operated at an optimal timing, the below-described sub control board 400 is described later. A process of turning on an LED provided on the right stop button operation display unit 35R via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 to be described later performs a process of turning on the LED provided in the right stop button operation display unit 35R in the ART state to be described later, and then the operation of the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, a process of turning off the LED provided on the right stop button operation display unit 35R via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. This notifies that it is the optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13. Thereby, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later is the ART state, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Start lever LED36)
The start lever LED 36 is provided inside the start lever 10. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs a process of turning on or blinking the start lever LED 36 via the below-described panel LED relay board 700 and the below-described start lever LED board 709 at a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to perform a visual appeal to the player.

(Lumbar panel 37)
The waist panel 37 is provided below the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and is provided to allow the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1.

(Tray unit 38)
The saucer unit 38 is provided below the waist panel 37. Further, the tray unit 38 is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout port 39 which will be described later.

(Medal payout exit 39)
The medal payout opening 39 is provided below the waist panel 37 and is provided to discharge medals paid out by a hopper 202 described later when the medals are paid out. The medal payout port 39 is provided for discharging an improper medal when a selector sensor 15s described later determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal. Further, the medal payout opening 39 is inserted at a timing when it is impossible to accept the insertion of the medal when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 at a timing when the medal insertion cannot be accepted. It is provided to eject medals.

(Upper left speaker 40)
The upper left speaker 40 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The upper left speaker 40 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Lower left speaker 41)
The lower left speaker 41 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower left speaker 41 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Upper right speaker 42)
The upper right speaker 42 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The upper right speaker 42 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Lower right speaker 43)
The lower right speaker 43 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower right speaker 43 is provided for outputting BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Setting display section 44)
The setting display unit 44 is provided on a main control board 300 which will be described later, and is provided for displaying a setting value of the gaming machine 1. Here, the main control board 300 described later is currently set when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a setting change key hole 48 described later and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle. Processing for displaying the set value on the setting display unit 44 is performed.

(Setting change button 45)
The setting change button 45 is provided on a setting switch board 250 described later, and is provided to change a setting value. Here, the main control board 300 to be described later displays on the setting display unit 44 when an operation of the setting change button 45 is detected in a state where the setting value currently set is displayed on the setting display unit 44. A process of switching the displayed set value and displaying it is performed. Then, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of determining the set value when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected in a state where the currently set value is displayed on the setting display unit 44. . It should be noted that the main control board 300 to be described later performs a process of canceling the error based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 45 when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1. In other words, in the present embodiment, the setting change button 45 has (a) a function for switching a setting value and (b) a function for canceling an error.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are set in the “6” stage from the setting “1” to the setting “6”. For this reason, when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected in a state where the information indicating that the setting is “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the setting display unit 44 indicates that the setting is “2”. The information is displayed, and thereafter, every time the setting change button 45 is operated, the set value displayed on the setting display unit 44 is added and displayed by “1”. However, when the setting change button 45 is operated in the state where the information indicating that the setting is “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the information indicating that the setting is “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 44. Will be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are set at the “6” stage from the setting “1” to the setting “6”. However, the setting value is not limited to this. For example, the set value may be the “2” stage, the “3” stage, the “4” stage, or the “5” stage.

(Liquid crystal display device 46)
The liquid crystal display device 46 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for displaying moving images, still images, and the like. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 is the ART state, the later-described sub-control board 400 performs “push order bells A1 to A4” or “push-order bells” by an internal lottery process described later. When any one of “B1 to B4” is determined, processing for displaying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 600. Do.

(External concentration terminal board 47)
The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided on the lower right side of the setting switch board 250, which will be described later, and (a) the number of medals used in the game with respect to the outside of the gaming machine 1 such as a hall computer (not shown). (B) a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, and (c) a state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later has shifted to the ART state. (D) A Bonus state signal that can specify that a state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later has shifted to a Bonus state, and (e) A state-control signal that is managed by a sub-control board 400 described later. A first added state signal that can specify that the state has shifted to the first added state; and (f) a security signal that can specify that an illegal act has been performed. It is.

  More specifically, the “ART state signal” is a signal output when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the fourth RT gaming state, and the “Bonus state signal” is This is a signal that is output when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the third RT gaming state, and the “first added state signal” is the state that is managed by the main control board 300 changed to the fifth RT gaming state. It is a signal that is output when transitioned.

(Setting change keyhole 48)
The setting change keyhole 48 is provided on a setting switch board 250, which will be described later, and is provided to change a setting value. A setting change key switch 49sw (described later) detects that the setting change key hole 48 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with a setting change key (not shown) inserted in the setting change key hole 48. Is provided.

(Director 50)
The effect device 50 is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 46. Here, when it is determined that the effect device 50 can be moved, the sub control board 400 performs a process of moving the effect device 50 in the vertical direction via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650. Do. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Status board 100)
The status board 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23. The status board 100 also includes a BET switch 7sw described later, a MAXBET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a middle stop switch 12sw described later, and a right stop described later. A switch 13sw, a selector sensor 15s, an error release sensor 16s, a door opening / closing sensor 17s, a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number indicator 28, a payout number indicator 29, A throwable display lamp 30 and a replay display lamp 31 are connected.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 (see FIG. 4) is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and controls the rotation and stop of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Is provided. The reel control board 150 includes a left stepping motor 151 to be described later, a middle stepping motor 152 to be described later, a right stepping motor 153 to be described later, a left reel sensor 154s to be described later, a middle reel sensor 155s to be described later, and a right reel sensor 156s to be described later. Is connected.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided for controlling the left reel 18. The left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after detecting the reel index.

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided for controlling the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation axis at a specified angle. As a result, the intermediate reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the intermediate stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after detecting the reel index.

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided for controlling the right reel 20. The right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after detecting the reel index.

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154s (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the left reel 18, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has rotated “1”.

(Medium reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the middle reel 19, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. The middle reel sensor 155s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has rotated “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the right reel 20, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The right reel sensor 156s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has rotated “1”.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply board 200 is provided on the left side of the hopper 202, which will be described later, and is provided for performing control to supply power to the gaming machine 1. Further, a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, and an auxiliary storage sensor 203s described later are connected to the power supply board 200.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side of a front view of a hopper 202 described later, and is provided for performing an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply board 200 as viewed from the front, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the active line. Process to pay out.

(Auxiliary storage 203)
The auxiliary storage 203 is provided on the right side of the hopper 202 as viewed from the front, and is provided to store the overflowing medals when the medals stored in the hopper 202 overflow.

(Setting switch board 250)
The setting switch board 250 is provided on the right side of the main control board 300 described later when viewed from the front. The setting switch board 250 is connected to a setting change switch 45sw described later and a setting change key switch 49sw described later.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the left side of the setting switch board 250 when viewed from the front, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304 described later. Further, the main control board 300 is connected with a setting display section 44, an external concentration terminal board 47, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 described later. A main chip is mounted on the main control board 300, and a main chip ID, which is unique individual information, is recorded in a register provided in the main control board 300. The main chip ID may be recorded in the main ROM 302.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is provided on the left side of the main control board 300 when viewed from the front, and is provided mainly for controlling the production. The sub control board 400 includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Further, the main control board 300, a backlight relay board 450 described later, an effect control board 600 described later, and a panel LED relay board 700 described later are connected to the sub control board 400.

(Backlight relay board 450)
The backlight relay board 450 is provided below the main control board 300, and relays between the sub control board 400, a left backlight board 451 described later, a middle backlight board 452 described later, and a right backlight board 453 described later. Is provided to do. In addition, a sub-control board 400, a later-described left backlight board 451, a later-described middle backlight board 452, and a later-described right backlight board 453 are connected to the backlight relay board 450.

(Left backlight substrate 451)
The left backlight substrate 451 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is connected to a left backlight 461 described later. Further, the left backlight substrate 451 is provided for performing light emission control of the left backlight 461 described later from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

  In FIG. 2, the illustration of the sheet mounted on the left reel 18 is omitted to describe the left stepping motor 151, the left reel sensor 154 s, and the left backlight substrate 451.

(Medium backlight substrate 452)
The middle backlight substrate 452 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is connected to a middle backlight 462 described later. The middle backlight board 452 is provided for performing light emission control of the middle backlight 462, which will be described later, from the sub control board 400 via the backlight relay board 450.

(Right backlight substrate 453)
The right backlight substrate 453 is provided inside the right reel 20, and a right backlight 463 described later is connected thereto. Further, the right backlight substrate 453 is provided for performing light emission control of the right backlight 463 described later from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

(Amplifier board 500)
The amplifier board 500 is provided above the upper left speaker 40 and outputs BGM data, audio data, sound effect data, and the like from the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43. It is provided to perform control. In addition, an upper left speaker 40, a lower left speaker 41, an upper right speaker 42, a lower right speaker 43, and an effect control board 600 described later are connected to the amplifier board 500.

(Production control board 600)
The effect control board 600 is provided on the upper back of the front door 3 and is provided mainly for executing effects. The effect control board 600 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 601 described later, a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later, a liquid crystal control RAM 603 described later, a CGROM 604 described later, a sound source IC 605 described later, a sound source ROM 606 described later, and a VDP 607 described later. Further, the effect control board 600 is connected with a liquid crystal display device 46, an amplifier board 500, and an after-mentioned effect device drive board 650.

(Director drive board 650)
The effect device drive board 650 is provided below an effect device drive relay board 750, which will be described later, and is provided for performing control to move the effect device 50. The effect device drive board 650 includes an effect device 50, an effect control board 600, a left effect device motor 651, which will be described later, an upper left effect device sensor 652s, which will be described later, a lower left effect device sensor 653s, which will be described later, and a right effect device motor 654, which will be described later. , Later described upper right effect device sensor 655s, later described lower right effect device sensor 656s, later described left liquid crystal lift motor 657, later described upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s, later described lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s, later described right liquid crystal lift motor 660, An upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s, which will be described later, a lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s, which will be described later, and an effect device drive relay board 750, which will be described later, are connected.

(Comparator LED relay board 700)
The panel LED relay board 700 is provided above the lower left speaker 41. The sub-control board 400, a MAXBET button LED board 701 described later, a stop button LED board 702 described later, an effect button LED board 703 described later, Lumbar panel LED substrate 704, Bonus display LED substrate 705 described later, ART display LED substrate 706 described later, RUSH display LED substrate 707 described later, stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later, start lever LED substrate 709 described later, described later An effect button sensor 710s is provided to relay a cross key substrate 711, which will be described later. The panel LED relay board 700 includes a sub control board 400, a MAXBET button LED board 701, which will be described later, a stop button LED board 702, which will be described later, an effect button LED board 703, which will be described later, a waist panel LED board 704, which will be described later. Bonus display LED board 705, later-described ART display LED board 706, later-described RUSH display LED board 707, later-described stop button operation LED board 708, later-described start lever LED board 709, later-described effect button sensor 710s, later-described cross key A substrate 711 is connected.

(Director drive relay board 750)
The effect device drive relay board 750 is provided above the effect control board 600, and is provided to relay the effect device drive board 650, the effect device control board 800 described later, and the LED control board 850 described later. . The effect device drive relay board 750 is connected to an effect device drive board 650, an effect device control board 800 described later, and an LED control board 850 described later.

(Top LED board 851)
The top LED board 851 is provided above the effect control board 600 and is provided to control the top LED 861 described later. The top LED board 851 is connected to a top LED 861 described later.

(Corner LED board 852)
The corner LED boards 852 are provided on the left and right sides of the rendering device drive relay board 750, and are provided for controlling the corner LEDs 862 described later. The corner LED substrate 852 is connected to a corner LED 862 described later.

(Side LED board 853)
The side LED boards 853 are provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on both the left and right sides of the display window 23, and are provided to control the side LEDs 863 described later. Further, a side LED 863 described later is connected to the side LED substrate 853.

(Tray side LED board 854)
The saucer side LED board 854 is provided on the back side of the front door 3, outside the left lower speaker 41 and outside the right lower speaker 43, and is provided to control a saucer side LED 864 described later. ing. In addition, a saucer side LED 864 described later is connected to the saucer side LED substrate 854.

(Receiver LED board 855)
The saucer LED substrate 855 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on the back side of the saucer unit 38, and is provided to control a saucer LED 865 described later. In addition, a tray LED 865 described later is connected to the tray LED substrate 855.

(Top LED861)
The top LED 861 is provided above the liquid crystal display device 46. Further, the top LED 861 is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern and the like appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of turning on and blinking the top LED 861 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the top LED board 851. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Corner LED 862)
The corner LEDs 862 are provided on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 46. In addition, the corner LED 862 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the corner LED 862 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the corner LED board 852. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Side LED 863)
The side LEDs 863 are provided at the left and right ends of the gaming machine 1. The side LED 863 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the side LED 863 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the side LED board 853. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Tray side LED864)
The saucer side LED 864 is provided below the side LED 863. In addition, the tray side LED 864 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer side LED 864 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the saucer side LED board 854. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Tray LED 865)
The saucer LED 865 is provided on the front side of the saucer unit 38 in front view. In addition, the tray LED 865 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer LED 865 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the saucer LED board 855. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(BET switch 7sw)
The BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the BET button 7. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the BET button 7 is detected by the BET switch 7sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of using “1” medals from the stored (credit) medals based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(MAXBET switch 8sw)
The MAXBET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Here, when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300. The main control board 300 performs processing of using “3” medals from the stored (credit) medals based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the payment button 9 is detected by the payment switch 9sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of adjusting the stored medals based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100. Specifically, the main control board 300 transmits a signal to the effect that the stored medals are returned to the power supply board 200. Then, the power supply substrate 200 performs a process of returning the stored medals by driving the hopper 202.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The main control board 300 performs processing for starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating left reel 18 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating middle reel 19 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating right reel 20 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Selector sensor 15s)
The selector sensor 15 s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the selector sensor 15s detects the passage of a normal medal. Then, the main control board 300, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100, (a) a process of adding “1” to the number of medals to be stored (credited) or (b) used for a game Processing to add “1” to the number of medals to be performed is performed.

(Setting change switch 45sw)
The setting change switch 45sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the setting change button 45. Here, the setting switch board 250 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected by the setting change switch 45sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of updating and displaying the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the setting switch board 250.

(Setting change key switch 49sw)
The setting change key switch 49sw is a switch for detecting that a setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48. Here, when it is detected that the setting switch board 250 is rotated by a predetermined angle with a setting change key (not shown) being inserted into the setting change key hole 48, the setting switch board 250 is connected to the main control board 300. To transmit a predetermined signal. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of displaying the current setting value on the setting display unit 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the setting switch board 250.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, the power supply board 200 performs a process of supplying power to the gaming machine 1 when the operation of the power button 201 is detected by the power switch 201sw.

(Auxiliary storage sensor 203s)
The auxiliary storage sensor 203s is a sensor for detecting that medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full. Here, the power supply board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the auxiliary storage sensor 203s detects that the medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full. . The main control board 300 performs error processing when the medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full based on receiving a predetermined signal from the power supply board 200.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302, which will be described later, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process in accordance with the progress of the game, so that the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power board 200, and the sub control board. A predetermined signal is transmitted to 400. Examples of the predetermined signal include transmission of a game information command, transmission of first inspection value information, and the like. That is, the main CPU 301 functions as a game information command transmission unit and a first inspection value transmission unit. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302 which will be described later and executes the first game control. The main CPU 301 constitutes an error detection unit that detects an error when an error occurs.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is provided on the main control board 300. The main ROM 302 is provided for storing a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes an array data table (see FIG. 6) described later, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 7) whose symbol combination group is described later (see FIG. 7), and a symbol whose group combination group is “01”. A combination table (see FIG. 8), a symbol combination table (see FIG. 9) whose symbol combination group described below is “02”, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 10) whose symbol combination group is “03”, and a symbol combination described below A symbol combination table (see FIG. 11) whose group is “04”, a first winning combination determination table for a non-RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 13), and a first winning combination determination table for a first RT gaming state described later (FIG. 14). 2) a first winning combination determination table for a second RT gaming state (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, and a first winning combination determination table for a third RT gaming state, which will be described later (see FIG. 16). ), A first winning combination determination table for a 4RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 17), a first winning combination determination table for a fifth RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 18), and a first winning combination for a sixth RT gaming state described later. A combination determination table (see FIG. 19), a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 20) described later, and the like are stored.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided on the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with various storage areas such as various counters such as an insertion number counter and a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is provided on the main control board 300. The main random number generator 304 is provided for generating a random number used in a lottery or the like for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates a random number value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is provided on the sub control board 400. In addition, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402 described later, and is predetermined based on information on a command received from the main control board 300, a signal input from the effect button sensor 710s and the cross key board 711. And the result of the calculation is provided to the effect control board 600, the amplifier board 500, and the like. The sub CPU 401 functions as a second control unit that reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402 described later and executes second game control. Further, the sub CPU 401 constitutes an error detection unit that detects an error when an error occurs.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided for storing a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 has an effect determination table (see FIG. 24) described later, a bonus preparation state shift lottery table (see FIG. 25) described later, a bonus state distribution lottery table (see FIG. 26) described later, and a later-described Predictor game number determination table (see FIG. 27), chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 28) described later, fake game number determination table (see FIG. 29) described later, promotion lottery table (see FIG. 30) described later, and ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31), ART state game number extra lottery table (see FIG. 32), pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33), and additional state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34). Etc.) are stored.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the sub CPU 401. Specifically, the sub RAM 403 is provided with various counters such as a Bonus precursor state game number counter and various storage areas such as a state storage area.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub-random number generator 404 is provided for generating a random number used in a lottery or the like for determining the production. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub-random number generator 404 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Left backlight 461)
The left backlight 461 is provided on the left backlight substrate 451 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of causing the left backlight 461 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the left backlight board 451. Thereby, the visual recognition of the symbol of the left reel 18 becomes easy.

(Medium backlight 462)
The middle backlight 462 is provided on the middle backlight substrate 452 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the middle backlight 462 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the middle backlight board 452. Thereby, the visual recognition of the design of the middle reel 19 is facilitated.

(Right backlight 463)
The right backlight 463 is provided on the right backlight substrate 453 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the right backlight 463 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the right backlight board 453. Thereby, the visual recognition of the design of the right reel 20 is facilitated.

(LCD control CPU 601)
The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is provided for reading a program stored in a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later and creating a display list based on a signal received from the sub control board 400. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs control to display image data stored in a CGROM 604 described later on the liquid crystal display device 46.

(LCD control ROM 602)
The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is provided to store a control program executed by the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the liquid crystal control ROM 602 includes a control processing program of the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes that are referred to when displaying an animation, and an animation scene display order. A weight frame indicating an image display time, various target data such as a sprite identification number and a transfer source address, various parameters such as a sprite display position and a transfer destination address, a drawing method, and the like are stored.

(Liquid crystal control RAM 603)
The liquid crystal control RAM 603 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control RAM 603 functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs arithmetic processing, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 602.

(CGROM604)
The CGROM 604 is provided on the effect control board 600. The CGROM 604 includes color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels) and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. It is provided for compressing and storing image data comprising a set.

(Sound source IC 605)
The sound source IC 605 is provided on the effect control board 600. The sound source IC 605 reads a program and data related to sound stored in a sound source ROM 606, which will be described later, and generates sound signals for driving the upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, and lower right speaker 43. It is provided for.

(Sound source ROM 606)
The sound source ROM 606 is provided on the effect control board 600. The sound source ROM 606 is provided for storing a program, data, and the like related to a sound output when performing an effect.

(VDP607)
The VDP 607 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the frame buffer areas of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 601. Do. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (for example, an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) is generated, and thereby control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. The VDP 607 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Left rendering device motor 651)
The left effect device motor 651 is connected to the effect device drive board 650. The left effect device motor 651 is provided to move the effect device 50 in the vertical direction together with a later-described right effect device motor 654.

(Upper left rendering device sensor 652s)
The upper left rendering device sensor 652s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper left effect device sensor 652s is provided together with an upper right effect device sensor 655s, which will be described later, to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved upward. .

(Lower left rendering device sensor 653s)
The lower left rendering device sensor 653s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. Also, the lower left effect device sensor 653s is provided together with the lower right effect device sensor 656s described later to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved downward. Yes.

(Right effect device motor 654)
The right effect device motor 654 is connected to the effect device drive board 650. The right effect device motor 654 is provided together with the left effect device motor 651 to move the effect device 50 in the vertical direction.

(Upper right rendering device sensor 655s)
The upper right rendering device sensor 655s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper right effect device sensor 655s is provided together with the upper left effect device sensor 652s to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved upward.

(Lower right rendering device sensor 656s)
The lower right rendering device sensor 656s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower right effect device sensor 656s is provided together with the lower left effect device sensor 653s to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved downward.

(Left LCD lift motor 657)
The left liquid crystal lift motor 657 is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The left liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 657 is provided to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction together with the right liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 660 described later.

(Upper left LCD lift sensor 658s)
The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s is provided together with an upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s described later to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward. ing.

(Lower left LCD lift sensor 659s)
The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s is provided together with the lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s, which will be described later, to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward. It has been.

(Right LCD lift motor 660)
The right liquid crystal lift motor 660 is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The right liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 660 is provided together with the left liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 657 to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction.

(Upper right LCD lift sensor 661s)
The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s is provided together with the upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward. .

(Lower right LCD lift sensor 662s)
The lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s is provided together with the lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward. Yes.

(MAXBET button LED board 701)
The MAXBET button LED substrate 701 is connected to a MAXBET button LED 721 described later, and is provided for performing processing of emitting a MAXBET button LED 721 described later. Here, when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is valid, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a later-described MAXBET button LED 721 via the MAXBET button LED board 701 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, notification that the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is effective is performed.

(Stop button LED board 702)
A stop button LED board 702 is connected to a stop button LED 722 to be described later, and is provided for performing a process of emitting light to a stop button LED 722 to be described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a stop button LED 722 to be described later via the stop button LED board 702 of the panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, the sub control board 400 emits a stop button LED 722 (described later) provided inside the left stop button 11 via the stop button LED board 702 when the left stop button 11 is valid. When the middle stop button 12 is valid, a stop button LED 722 (described later) provided inside the middle stop button 12 is emitted via the stop button LED board 702, and the right stop button 13 is valid. In some cases, a process for emitting a later-described stop button LED 722 provided inside the right stop button 13 through the stop button LED substrate 702 is performed. Thereby, notification that the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is effective is performed.

(Production button LED board 703)
The effect button LED board 703 is connected to an effect button LED 723 described later, and is provided for performing processing of emitting an effect button LED 723 described later. Here, when the operation of the effect button 21 is valid, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting an effect button LED 723 described later via the effect button LED board 703 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, it is notified that the operation of the effect button 21 is effective.

(Lumbar panel LED substrate 704)
A waist panel LED substrate 704 is connected to a waist panel LED 724 described later, and is provided to perform a process of emitting light from a waist panel LED 724 described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a below-described waist panel LED 724 via the waist panel LED board 704 of the panel LED relay board 700. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel.

(Bonus display LED substrate 705)
The Bonus display LED substrate 705 is connected to the Bonus display unit 32 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the Bonus display unit 32. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the Bonus display unit 32 via the Bonus display LED board 705 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the Bonus state. A process of emitting light from the LED is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed into the below-mentioned Bonus state.

(ART display LED substrate 706)
The ART display LED substrate 706 is connected to the ART display unit 33, and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the ART display unit 33. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the ART display unit 33 via the ART display LED board 706 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the ART state. A process of emitting light from the LED is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed to the below-mentioned ART state.

(RUSH display LED substrate 707)
The RUSH display LED substrate 707 is connected to the RUSH display unit 34 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the RUSH display unit 34 via the RUSH display LED board 707 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the first addition state. The process which light-emits LED which is lighted is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed to the below-mentioned 1st addition state.

(Stop button operation LED board 708)
The stop button operation LED board 708 is connected to the stop button operation display unit 35 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the stop button operation display unit 35. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light emitted from the LEDs provided in the stop button operation display unit 35 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is an ART state described later, the sub-control board 400 displays the panel LED when it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11. If it is the optimal timing to light the LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L and operate the middle stop button 12 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the relay board 700, the control panel When it is the optimal timing to turn on the LED provided in the middle stop button operation display part 35C and operate the right stop button 13 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the LED relay board 700, Through the stop button operation LED board 708 of the panel LED relay board 700, the right stop button operation display unit 35R is displayed. The process of lighting the vignetting in which LED performs. Thereby, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Start lever LED board 709)
The start lever LED substrate 709 is connected to the start lever LED 36 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36 at a predetermined timing via the start lever LED board 709 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Direction button sensor 710s)
The effect button sensor 710 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect the operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 710 s transmits a predetermined signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(Cross key board 711)
The cross key board 711 is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect the operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key board 711 transmits a predetermined signal to the sub-control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(MAX BET button LED721)
The MAXBET button LED 721 is provided inside the MAXBET button 8 and is connected to the MAXBET button LED board 701. Here, the MAXBET button LED 721 is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8, and is turned off when it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Thereby, it is notified that it is the timing to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8 and the timing to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8.

(Stop button LED722)
The stop button LED 722 includes (a) a left stop button LED 722L provided inside the left stop button 11, (b) a middle stop button LED 722C provided inside the middle stop button 12, and (c) a right stop. A right stop button LED 722R provided inside the button 13 is provided.

(Left stop button LED722L)
The left stop button LED 722L (not shown) is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11. Specifically, the left stop button LED 722L is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11, and is turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the left stop button 11. Accordingly, (a) it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11, and (b) notification that it is time to not accept the operation of the left stop button 11.

(Intermediate stop button LED722C)
The middle stop button LED 722C (not shown) is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the middle stop button 12. Specifically, the middle stop button LED 722C is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the middle stop button 12, and turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the middle stop button 12. Thereby, it is notified that it is the timing when the operation of the stop button 12 during (a) is received and the timing when the operation of the stop button 12 during (b) is not received.

(Right stop button LED722R)
The right stop button LED 722R (not shown) is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the right stop button 13. Specifically, the right stop button LED 722R is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the right stop button 13, and is turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the right stop button 13. Accordingly, (a) it is time to accept the operation of the right stop button 13, and (b) notification that it is time to not accept the operation of the right stop button 13.

(Direction button LED723)
The effect button LED 723 is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the effect button 21. Specifically, the effect button LED 723 is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the effect button 21, and is turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the effect button 21. Thereby, (a) it is the timing which receives operation of the production button 21, and (b) it is alert | reported that it is timing which does not receive operation of the production button 21. FIG.

(Lumbar panel LED724)
The waist panel LED 724 is provided to make it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. Here, the waist panel LED 724 is lit when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, etc. of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. Note that the lumbar panel LED 724 may be turned off based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been satisfied. Thereby, it can be notified to the player that a predetermined condition has been satisfied.

(Production device control board 800)
The effect device control board 800 is provided to control an upper left effect device 811 described later, a lower left effect device 812 described later, an upper right effect device 813 described later, and a lower right effect device 814 described later. The effect device control board 800 is connected to the effect device drive relay board 750, the upper left effect device board 801, the lower left effect device board 802, the upper right effect device board 803, and the lower right effect device board 804.

(Upper left rendering device substrate 801)
An upper left effect device substrate 801 is connected to an upper left effect device 811 described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper left effect device 811 described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in an upper left effect device 811 described later via an effect control board 600, an effect device drive board 650, an effect device drive relay board 750, an effect device control board 800, and an upper left effect device board 801. The process which light-emits LED which performs is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Lower left rendering device board 802)
The lower left effect device substrate 802 is connected to a lower left effect device 812, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower left effect device 812, which will be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the lower left effect device 812 described later via the effect control substrate 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, the effect device control board 800, and the lower left effect device board 802. The process which light-emits LED which performs is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Upper right rendering device board 803)
The upper right effect device substrate 803 is connected to an upper right effect device 813, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper right effect device 813, which will be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in an upper right effect device 813 described later via an effect control substrate 600, an effect device drive board 650, an effect device drive relay board 750, an effect device control board 800, and an upper right effect device board 803. The process which light-emits LED which performs is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Lower right rendering device board 804)
A lower right effect device substrate 804 is connected to a lower right effect device 814, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower right effect device 814, which will be described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 is transferred to the lower right effect device 814 (described later) via the effect control substrate 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, the effect device control board 800, and the lower right effect device board 804. The process which light-emits LED provided is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Upper left rendering device 811)
The upper left rendering device 811 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the upper left rendering device substrate 801. In addition, the upper left rendering device 811 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the upper left rendering device 811 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Lower left rendering device 812)
The lower left rendering device 812 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the lower left rendering device substrate 802. In addition, the lower left rendering device 812 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the lower left rendering device 812 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Upper right rendering device 813)
The upper right effect device 813 is provided on the back side of the effect device 50 and is connected to the upper right effect device substrate 803. Further, the upper right rendering device 813 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the upper right rendering device 813 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Lower right rendering device 814)
The lower right rendering device 814 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the lower right rendering device substrate 804. Also, the lower right rendering device 814 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the lower right rendering device 814 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(LED control board 850)
The LED control board 850 is provided to control the top LED 861, the corner LED 862, the side LED 863, the saucer side LED 864, and the saucer LED 865. The LED control board 850 is connected to a top LED board 851, a corner LED board 852, a side LED board 853, a saucer side LED board 854, and a saucer LED board 855.

(Moving aspect of the rendering device 50)
Next, the movable aspect of the rendering device 50 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the rendering device 50 includes a base portion 51, a handle portion 52, and a sheath portion 53.

(Base part 51)
The base portion 51 is a member that serves as a base of the effect device 50, and incorporates an LED in a portion covered with the handle portion 52 and the sheath portion 53. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the LED built in the base unit 51 to emit light via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650 when executing a predetermined effect. In addition, an upper left effect device 811, a lower left effect device 812, an upper right effect device 813, and a lower right effect device 814 are provided on the back side of the base portion 51.

(Pattern 52)
The handle 52 is attached to the left side of the base 51 in front view. The handle 52 has a shape imitating a Japanese sword handle. The handle 52 is movable in the left-right direction.

(Sheath 53)
The sheath portion 53 is attached to the right side of the base portion 51 as viewed from the front. The sheath portion 53 has a shape imitating the sheath of a Japanese sword. Moreover, the sheath part 53 is movable in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the sub control board 400 drives the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, thereby causing the effect device 50 to move. A process that moves upward is performed. Then, when it is detected by the upper left effect device sensor 652s and the upper right effect device sensor 655s that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position, the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 perform the operation of the effect device 50. The upward movement is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, after the effect device 50 is moved to a predetermined position, the sub control board 400 moves the handle 52 in the left direction in front view via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650. The movable process and the process of moving the sheath 53 in the right direction when viewed from the front are performed, and the upper left effect device 811 and the lower left effect device 812 are provided via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800. Then, a process of moving the upper right effect device 813 and the lower right effect device 814 is performed. In addition, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting the LED incorporated in the base part that is not covered by the movement of the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and Via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800, the LED incorporated in the upper left effect device 811, the LED incorporated in the lower left effect device 812, and the upper right effect device 813. The LED and the LED incorporated in the lower right effect device 814 are processed to emit light.

  Note that, after the effect by the effect device 50 as shown in FIG. 5C is performed, the sub control board 400 passes through the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, the left effect device motor 651, and the right By driving the effect device motor 654, a process of moving the effect device 50 downward is performed. When the lower left effect device sensor 653s and the lower right effect device sensor 656s detect that the effect device 50 has been moved to the original position before moving, the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 are detected. The downward movement of the rendering device 50 is stopped. In addition, when the sub-control board 400 moves the effect device 50 downward, the sub-control board 400 moves the handle 52 in the right direction in front view via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and a sheath part. 53 is moved in the left direction when viewed from the front, and through the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800, the upper left effect device 811, the lower left effect device 812, the upper right effect device 813, the right A process of returning the lower effect device 814 to the original position is performed. Further, the sub control board 400 performs a process of turning off the LED built in the base part covered with the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and the effect control board 600. The LED built in the upper left rendering device 811, the LED built in the lower left rendering device 812, and the LED built in the upper right rendering device 813 via the rendering device drive board 650 and the rendering device control board 800. Then, the process of turning off the LED built in the lower right effect device 814 is performed. Thereby, the rendering device 50 returns to the original position.

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect the reel index. Is defined as “00”. Also, symbol positions “00” to “20” are defined based on the symbol position “00”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00” is stored in the main ROM 302, and includes a symbol combination name, a bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, a symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, and a symbol combination. The number of medals to be paid out to the player is defined.

  In addition, “preparation replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP01” in the bit “00000001” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, and the symbol bit name “REP02” is included in the bit “00000010”. "First Bonus replay" is defined, bit "00000100" is defined as symbol bit name "REP03", "second Bonus replay" is defined, and bit "00001000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP04". "3rd Bonus Replay" is defined, "ART Replay" is defined as the symbol bit name "REP05" in the bit "00010000", and the symbol bit name "REP06" is defined in the bit "00100000". As "Special Lip ”Is defined,“ RUSH replay ”is defined for the bit“ 01000000 ”as the symbol bit name“ REP07 ”, and“ middle stage replay ”is defined for the bit“ 10000000 ”as the symbol bit name“ REP08 ”. Is stipulated.

  Here, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the main CPU 301 pays out medals, activates a re-game, and plays a game state. Control which gives privilege, such as transfer, is performed. For example, when the symbol combination “replay A”, “replay A”, and “BAR” is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 displays the symbol combination related to “preparation replay”. It determines with having been carried out, and the control which transfers to the below-mentioned 2RT gaming state is performed with the action | operation of a re-game. Note that if the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, it is “lost”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”)
Next, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” will be described with reference to FIG.

  Similar to the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” is stored in the main ROM 302. The symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, The symbol name corresponding to the bit, the combination of symbols, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” of the symbol combination group “01”, “upward right replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP09”, and the symbol bit name “00000010” includes the symbol bit name “ “BAR replay” is defined as “REP10”, “upper watermelon play” is defined as symbol bit name “REP11” in bit “00000100”, and symbol bit name “REP12” is defined in bit “00001000”. "Lower watermelon play" is defined, bit "00010000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP13", "upper cherry replay" is defined, and bit "00100000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP14". "" "Rei" is defined, "First Chance Replay" is defined in the bit "01000000" as the symbol bit name "REP15", and "10000000" is defined as the symbol bit name "REP16". The “second chance replay” is defined.

  Here, in this embodiment, “preparation replay”, “first bonus replay”, “second bonus replay”, “third bonus replay”, “ART replay”, “special replay”, “RUSH replay”, “middle replay”. ”,“ Upward right replay ”,“ BAR replay ”,“ upper watermelon play ”,“ lower watermelon play ”,“ upper cherry replay ”,“ lower cherry replay ”,“ first chance replay ”,“ second chance ” When the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line, the re-game is activated. Here, when the re-game operation is performed, the game can be performed without inserting medals.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02” is stored in the main ROM 302 in the same manner as the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00” and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”. The combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  Also, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” of the symbol combination group “02”, “first push order bell” is defined as the symbol bit name “NML01”, and the symbol “00000010” includes the symbol bit. The name “NML02” is defined as “second push order bell”, the bit “00000100” is designated as the symbol bit name “NML03”, “third push order bell”, and the bit “00001000” is designated. “4th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML04”, and “5th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML05” in the bit “00010000”. “00100000” defines “sixth push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML06”. The bit “01000000” defines the “seventh push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML07”, and the bit “10000000” has the “eighth push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML08”. It is prescribed.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “03” includes the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00”, the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”, and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02”. Similarly, stored in the main ROM 302, the symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the symbol combination, and the medal to be paid out to the player The number of payouts is specified.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” in which the symbol combination group is “03”, the symbol bit name “NML09” is defined as “9th push order bell”, and the symbol “00000010” includes symbol bits. “10th push order bell” is defined as the name “NML10”, “11th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML11” in the bit “00000100”, and the bit “00001000” Is defined with the symbol bit name “NML12” as “12th pushing order bell”, the bit “00010000” is defined with the symbol bit name “NML13” as “correct answer bell”, and the bit “00100000”. Has a bit name “NML14” and “watermelon that goes up to the right” The bit “01000000” is defined as “Right-down watermelon” as the symbol bit name “NML15”, and the bit “10000000” is defined as “first chance” as the symbol bit name “NML16”. Yes.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04”)
Next, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” is a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”, Similar to the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03”, it is stored in the main ROM 302. The symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, The combination and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “04”, the bit “00000001” defines “second chance” as the symbol bit name “NML17”, and the bit “00000010” includes the symbol bit name. “NML18” defines “first cherry”, bit “00000100” defines symbol bit name “NML19”, “second cherry”, and bit “00001000” includes symbol bit name “NML20” defines “middle stage cherry”, bit “00010000” defines symbol bit name “BLK01”, “first blank”, and bit “00100000” includes symbol bit name “ BLK02 "is defined as" second blank "and bit To 01000000 ", as the symbol bit name" BLK03 "" third blank "are defined, the bit" 10000000 "is" fourth blank "is defined as the symbol bit name" BLK04 ".

  Here, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols relating to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “third push order bell”, “ A combination of symbols related to “4 push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “5th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “6th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “7th push order bell”, The combination of symbols related to “8th push order bell”, the combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, the combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, and the design related to “11th push order bell” Combination, symbol combination related to “12th push order bell”, symbol combination related to “correct answer bell”, symbol combination related to “right rising watermelon”, symbol combination related to “right falling watermelon”, “first "Combination of symbols related to" Cancele "," Combination of symbols related to "Second Chance", Combination of symbols related to "First Cherry", Combination of symbols related to "Second Cherry", When a combination of symbols is displayed on the active line, a medal is paid out.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “third push order bell”, and a “fourth push order bell” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to "5th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "6th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "7th push order bell", and an "8th push order bell" A combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “11th push order bell”, “12th push order” The combination of symbols relating to "Bell", the combination of symbols relating to "Bell", the combination of symbols relating to "Right-up watermelon", the combination of symbols relating to "Right-down watermelon", and the symbol relating to "First chance" Collectively, symbol combination related to “second chance”, symbol combination related to “first cherry”, symbol combination related to “second cherry”, symbol combination related to “middle cherries” This is a combination of symbols related to “winning”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “third push order bell”, and a “fourth push order bell” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to "5th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "6th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "7th push order bell", and an "8th push order bell" A combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “11th push order bell”, “12th push order” A combination of symbols relating to “bell” is collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to “push order bell”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “third push order bell”, and a “fourth push order bell” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to "5th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "6th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "7th push order bell", and an "8th push order bell" A combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “11th push order bell”, “12th push order” A combination of symbols relating to “bell” and a combination of symbols relating to “correct bell” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to “bell”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “rising watermelon” and a combination of symbols related to “downward watermelon” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to “watermelon”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “first chance” and a combination of symbols related to “second chance” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to “chance”.

  In addition, a symbol combination related to “first cherry”, a symbol combination related to “second cherry”, and a symbol combination related to “middle cherry” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “cherry”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “first blank”, a combination of symbols related to “second blank”, a combination of symbols related to “third blank”, and a combination of symbols related to “fourth blank” This is a combination of symbols related to “blank”.

  On the other hand, the symbol combination related to “Preparation Replay”, the symbol combination related to “First Bonus Replay”, the symbol combination related to “Second Bonus Replay”, the symbol combination related to “Third Bonus Replay”, and “ART Replay” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to “Special Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “RUSH Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Middle Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Right Up Replay”, “BAR Replay” A combination of symbols related to `` upper watermelon play '', a combination of symbols related to `` lower watermelon play '', a combination of symbols related to `` upper cherry replay '', a combination of symbols related to `` lower cherry replay '', Responsible for "First Chance Replay" Combination of symbols, are collectively the combination of symbols relating to the "second chance eyes Replay", that the combination of symbols relating to the "Replay".

  In addition, a symbol combination related to “First Bonus Replay”, a symbol combination related to “Second Bonus Replay”, and a symbol combination related to “Third Bonus Replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “Bonus Replay”.

  Further, a symbol combination related to “middle replay” and a symbol combination related to “upward replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “normal replay”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “upper watermelon play” and a combination of symbols related to “lower watermelon play” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to “watermelon play”.

  In addition, a symbol combination related to “upper cherry replay” and a symbol combination related to “lower cherry replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “cherry replay”.

  In addition, the symbol combination related to “first chance replay” and the symbol combination related to “second chance replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “chance eye replay”.

(Relationship between winning role, stop button operation order, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 12, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  In FIG. 12, the winning number corresponding to the winning combination, the contents of the winning number, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not each game state can be determined as the winning combination, and the stop operation order are on the active line. The relationship with the combination of the symbols which can be displayed is shown.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, the condition device to be operated varies depending on the determined winning combination. For example, when the winning combination of the winning number “13” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are to be activated are “REP08” and “REP09”. In other words, when the winning combination of the winning number “13” is determined, any combination of symbols related to “middle replay” or symbol combination related to “upward replay” is on the active line. Will be displayed.

  In this embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Depending on the order, winning combinations with different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided. For example, when the “Bonus replay BR1” with the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP08”, “REP09”, “REP10”. , “REP12”, and “REP15”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, any one of the symbol combinations related to “middle replay”, “upward replay”, “BAR replay”, or “lower watermelon play” is selected. The combination of symbols will be displayed on the active line. Further, when the middle stop button 12 is operated first, the symbol combination related to “middle stage replay” is displayed on the active line. In addition, when the right stop button 13 is first operated, one of the symbol combinations related to “middle stage replay” or “BAR replay” is displayed on the active line. .

  However, in this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, out of the symbol combinations related to “BAR replay”, the symbol combination allowed to be displayed on the effective line and the effective line There are combinations of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed. Similarly, even when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, among the symbol combinations related to “BAR replay”, the symbol combinations that are allowed to be displayed on the effective line and the symbol line are displayed on the effective line. There are combinations of symbols that are not allowed.

  On the other hand, a winning combination is provided in which the combination of symbols arranged on the active line does not differ regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when the “common bell” of the winning number “31” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “NML01”, “NML02”, “NML03”, “NML03” NML04, “NML05”, “NML06”, “NML07”, “NML08”, “NML09”, “NML10”, “NML11”, “NML12”, and “NML13”. In this case, whether the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated first, or the right stop button 13 is operated first, the “first push Of the symbol combinations related to “order bell”, “second push order bell”, “third push order bell”, “fourth push order bell”, or “correct answer bell”, any of the symbol combinations is an effective line. Will be displayed above.

  In addition, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at an appropriate timing regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Otherwise, the symbol combination related to “winning” may not be displayed on the active line. For example, when the “watermelon” with the winning number “25” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are activated are “NML14” and “NML15”. In this case, regardless of whether the left stop button 11 is first operated, the middle stop button 12 is first operated, or the right stop button 13 is first operated, ”Or the symbol combination related to“ Right-down watermelon ”can be displayed on the active line, but the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 can be displayed at an appropriate timing. If the right stop button 13 is not operated, one of the symbol combinations related to “Right-up watermelon” or the symbol combination related to “Right-down watermelon” is displayed on the active line. Never happen.

(First winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The non-RT gaming state first winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in a non-RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 13, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, a lottery value is defined only for “normal replay” of the winning number “13”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, “Replay AR3 during winning” “12” RT replay AR4 ”, winning number“ 14 ”“ RUSH replay R1 ”, winning number“ 15 ”“ RUSH replay R2 ”, winning number“ 16 ”“ state transition replay ”, winning number“ 17 ”“ Bonus ” “Medium Replay BR1”, Winning Number “18” “Bonus Replay BR2”, Winning Number “19” “Bonus Replay BR3”, Winning Number “20” “Watermelon Play”, Winning Number “21” “Weak” “Cherry Replay”, “Strong Cherry Replay” with the winning number “22”, and “Chance Eye Replay CR1” with the winning number “23” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for first RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first RT game state first winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the first RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 14, the lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the set value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first RT combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes “preparation state transfer replay JR1” with a win number “01”, “preparation state transfer replay JR2” with a win number “02”, and “ Lottery values are defined for “preparation state transition replay JR3”, “preparation state transition replay JR4” with a winning number “04”, and “direct hit Bonus” with a winning number “05”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with the winning number “06”, winning “Bonus rush replay BI2” with the number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with the winning number “08”, “Replay during ART AR1” with the winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with the winning number “10” The winning number “11” “ART replay AR3”, the winning number “12” “ART replay AR4”, the winning number “13” “normal replay”, the winning number “14” “RUSH replay R1”, “RUSH replay R2” with winning number “15”, “state transition replay” with winning number “16”, “Bonus replay BR1” with winning number “17” , “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18”, “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with a winning number “19”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, The “strong cherry replay” with the winning number “22” and the “chance eye replay CR1” with the winning number “23” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for second RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the second RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 15, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes “Bonus rush replay BI1” with the winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with the winning number “07”, and “Bonus rush” with the winning number “08”. A lottery value is defined in “Replay BI3”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “09 Replay AR1” with winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, “ART” with winning number “12” “Medium Replay AR4”, “Normal Replay” with Winning Number “13”, “RUSH Replay R1” with Winning Number “14”, “RUSH Replay R2” with Winning Number “15”, Winning "Status transition replay" of issue "16", "Replay BR1 during Bonus" with winning number "17", "Replay during Bonus BR2" with winning number "18", "Replay during Bonus BR3" with winning number "19", Winning number “20” “Watermelon Play”, Winning Number “21” “Weak Cherry Replay”, Winning Number “22” “Strong Cherry Replay”, Winning Number “23” “Chance Eye Replay CR1” Will not be determined as.

(First winning combination determination table for 3RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the third RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in this embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state includes a lottery value when the set value is “1”, a lottery value when the set value is “2”, and the set value is The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 16, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  The first RT combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state includes “normal replay” with a winning number “13”, “state transition replay” with a winning number “16”, and “Bonus replay BR1” with a winning number “17”. , “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18”, “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with a winning number “19”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, A lottery value is defined for “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, and “12” as winning number ART during the replay AR4 "," RUSH replay R1 "winning numbers" 14 "," RUSH replay R2 of the winning number "15" ", will not be determined as a winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for 4RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fourth RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT winning state determination table for the 4RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the fourth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value is The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 17, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the 4RT gaming state includes “Replay AR1 during ART” with a winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with a winning number “10”, “During ART” with a winning number “11”. “Replay AR3”, “Replay AR4 during ART” with winning number “12”, “Normal replay” with winning number “13”, “Watermelon play” with winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with winning number “21” A lottery value is defined for “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the 4RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “RUSH” with winning number “14” “Replay R1”, “RUSH Replay R2” with a winning number “15”, “State Transition Replay” with a winning number “16”, “Bonu” with a winning number “17” Medium replay BR1 "," Bonus in the Replay BR2 of the winning number "18" ", will not be determined as the" Bonus in the Replay BR3 "is the winning combination of winning numbers" 19 ".

(First winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fifth RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination table for the 5RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 18, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the first RT combination table for the 5RT gaming state includes “RUSH replay R1” with a winning number “14”, “RUSH replay R2” with a winning number “15”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, Lottery values are defined for “weak cherry replay” with winning number “21”, “strong cherry replay” with winning number “22”, and “chance eye replay CR1” with winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, and “12” as winning number "Replay AR4 during ART", "Normal replay" with winning number "13", "Status transition replay" with winning number "16", "Replay BR1 during Bonus" with winning number "17", "Bonus" with winning number "18" “Replay BR2” and “Bonus Replay BR3” with the winning number “19” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for 6RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later in the sixth RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first RT combination determination table for the 6RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the sixth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table includes the lottery value when the set value is “1”, the lottery value when the set value is “2”, and the set value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 19, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the 6RT gaming state includes “Replay AR1 during ART” with a winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with a winning number “10”, “During ART” with a winning number “11”. A lottery value is defined for “Replay AR3” and winning number “12” “Replay AR4 during ART”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “Normal” with winning number “13” "Replay", "RUSH replay R1" with winning number "14", "RUSH replay R2" with winning number "15", "Status transition rep" with winning number "16" "Bonus replay BR1" with winning number "17", "Replay BR2 with Bonus" with winning number "18", "Replay BR3 in Bonus" with winning number "19", "Watermelon with winning number" 20 " “Replay”, “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22”, and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23” are not determined as winning combinations.

  The first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state, The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, and the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state are collectively referred to as a “first winning combination determination table”.

  Note that “preparation state transfer replay JR1” with a winning number “01”, “preparation state transfer replay JR2” with a winning number “02”, “preparation state transfer replay JR3” with a winning number “03”, and a winning number “ 04 ”“ preparation state transition replay JR4 ”is collectively referred to as“ preparation state transition replay ”.

  Also, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, and “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08” are collectively referred to as “Bonus rush replay BI3”. "

  Also, the winning number “09” “ART replay AR1”, the winning number “10” “ART replay AR2”, the winning number “11” “ART replay AR3”, and the winning number “12”. “Replay during ART AR4” is collectively referred to as “replay during ART”.

  The winning number “14” “RUSH replay R1” and the winning number “15” “RUSH replay R2” are collectively referred to as “RUSH replay”.

  Also, “Replay BR1 during Bonus” with the winning number “17”, “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with the winning number “18”, and “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with the winning number “19” are collectively referred to as “Replay during Bonus”. "

  Also, “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21” and “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” are collectively referred to as “cherry replay”.

(Second winning combination determination table)
Next, the second winning combination determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The second winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and will be described later in a non-RT gaming state, a first RT gaming state, a second RT gaming state, a third RT gaming state, a fourth RT gaming state, a fifth RT gaming state, and a sixth RT. This is used when a winning combination is determined by an internal lottery process described later in the gaming state.

  Similarly to the first winning combination determination table, the second winning combination determination table includes all the winning numbers, the contents of the winning numbers, the lottery values for each set value, and the lottery values of the winning combinations corresponding to the winning numbers. Whether the value is a common setting value is defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the second winning combination determination table includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a case where the setting value is “3”. The lottery value, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, the lottery value when the set value is “5”, and the lottery value when the set value is “6” are respectively defined. In FIG. 20, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the second winning combination determination table includes “chance eye replay CR2” with a winning number “24”, “watermelon” with a winning number “25”, “weak cherry” with a winning number “26”, and a winning number “27”. “Strong Cherry”, “Middle Cherry” with Winning Number “28”, “Chance Eye CN1” with Winning Number “29”, “Chance Eye CN2” with Winning Number “30”, “Common Bell” with Winning Number “31” , “Push Order Bell A1” with a winning number “32”, “Push Order Bell B1” with a winning number “33”, “Push Order Bell A2” with a winning number “34”, “Push Order Bell” with a winning number “35”. “B2”, “Push Order Bell A3” with a winning number “36”, “Push Order Bell B3” with a winning number “37”, “Push Order Bell A4” with a winning number “38”, “Press” A lottery value is defined for “order bell B4”.

  Here, the relationship between the first winning combination determination table and the second winning combination determination table will be described. When a lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table, the winning combination is determined according to the current gaming state. There are rules regarding winning roles and winning roles that are not determined as winning roles. On the other hand, when a lottery is performed using the second winning combination determination table, a winning combination that can be determined as a winning combination in all game states is defined.

  The “chance eye replay CR1” with the winning number “23” and the “chance eye replay CR2” with the winning number “24” are collectively referred to as “chance eye replay”.

  Also, the “weak cherry” with the winning number “26”, the “strong cherry” with the winning number “27”, and the “middle cherry” with the winning number “28” are collectively referred to as “cherry”.

  The “chance eye CN1” with the winning number “29” and the “chance eye CN2” with the winning number “30” are collectively referred to as “chance eyes”.

  Also, the “common bell” of the winning number “31”, the “push order bell A1” of the winning number “32”, the “push order bell B1” of the winning number “33”, and the “push” of the winning number “34” "Sequence Bell A2", "Push Order Bell B2" with Winning Number "35", "Push Order Bell A3" with Winning Number "36", "Push Order Bell B3" with Winning Number "37", Winning Number The “push order bell A4” of “38” and the “push order bell B4” of the winning number “39” are collectively referred to as “bell”.

  In addition, the “push order bell A1” of the winning number “32”, the “push order bell B1” of the win number “33”, the “push order bell A2” of the win number “34”, and the win number “35”. “Push Order Bell B2”, “Push Order Bell A3” with a winning number “36”, “Push Order Bell B3” with a winning number “37”, “Push Order Bell A4” with a winning number “38”, The “push order bell B4” of the winning number “39” is collectively referred to as “push order bell”.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, the game state transition diagram will be described with reference to FIG.

  The game state transition diagram defines a current game state, a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the game state, and a game state of a transition destination.

  Here, in the case where the current gaming state is a non-RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the non-RT gaming state is Transition to the first RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” is displayed on the active line, the first RT gaming state is Transition to the second RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, when one of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, the first RT gaming state is Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the second RT gaming state is changed to the second RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the third RT gaming state is changed to the third RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, when any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the activated line, the fourth RT gaming state is changed to the fourth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, the fourth RT gaming state Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the 4RT gaming state, when one of the symbol combinations related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the sixth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the fifth RT gaming state is changed to the fifth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, when any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the sixth RT gaming state is changed to the sixth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, from the sixth RT gaming state, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

(List of states managed by sub control board)
Next, a list of states managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  The list of states managed by the sub control board is defined for the state names and the numbers corresponding to the state names. Here, the states managed by the sub-control board in this embodiment are “normal state” with the state number “01”, “chance precursor state” with the state number “02”, and “state with the state number“ 03 ”. “Bonus precursor state”, “Chance state” with state number “04”, “Bonus ready state” with state number “05”, “First Bonus state” with state number “06”, state number “07” “Second Bonus State”, “Third Bonus State” with State Number “08”, “First Falling Standby State” with State Number “09”, “ART Ready State” with State Number “10”, State Number “11” “ART state”, “12” “first additional sign state”, “13” “first additional preparation state”, “14” “first additional state” "Status", status number "15" "Falling standby state", "Second addition sign state" with state number "16", "Second addition preparation state" with state number "17", "Second addition state" with state number "18", state A “third fall standby state” with a number “19” and a “fourth fall standby state” with a state number “20” are defined.

(Transition diagram of states managed by sub-control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of states managed by the sub control board 400 are provided separately from the gaming state controlled by the main control board 300. Hereinafter, description of each state and conditions for transition to each state will be given.

(Normal state)
The normal state is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to performing the lottery for shifting to the Bonus ready state, the normal state is performed in the normal state by performing the lottery for shifting to the chance state that is easier to shift to the Bonus state than the normal state. Improves interest in games.

  Here, in the normal state, when the chance state shift lottery is won, control for shifting to the chance sign state is performed. Further, when the Bonus preparation state transition lottery is won, or when the value of a later-described ceiling game number counter becomes “0”, control for transitioning to the Bonus precursor state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Predicting chance)
The chance precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the chance state. Here, in the chance sign state, an effect that suggests transition to the chance state is performed until the value of the game number counter for chance sign state described later becomes “0”. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to shift to a chance state.

  Here, in the chance sign state, when the value of the game sign counter for chance sign state described later becomes “0”, control to shift to the chance state is performed. In addition, when the Bonus preparation state transition lottery is won in the chance sign state, or when the value of a later-described ceiling game number counter becomes “0”, control to transition to the Bonus sign state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Bonus precursor state)
The Bonus precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the Bonus state. Here, the Bonus precursor state has an effect that suggests transition to the Bonus state until the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter reaches “0”. As a result, the player can be expected to shift to the Bonus state.

  Here, in the Bonus precursor state, when the value of the below-mentioned Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0”, or when the value of the below-described ceiling game number counter is “0”, the Bonus preparation is performed. Control to shift to the state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Chance state)
The chance state is a state in which the transition to the Bonus preparation state is easier than in the normal state. As a result, when the player shifts to the chance state, the player expects to shift to the Bonus preparation state.

  Here, in the chance state, when the value of a chance state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, control for shifting to the normal state is performed. In the chance state, when the bonus preparation state transition lottery is won, or when the value of a later-described ceiling game number counter becomes “0”, control for shifting to the bonus preparation state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Bonus ready state)
The Bonus preparation state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition to the first Bonus state, the second Bonus state, and the third Bonus state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state, when the symbol combination related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift to one of the first Bonus state, the second Bonus state, and the third Bonus state. . In addition, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

  Here, in the Bonus preparation state, “Preparation state transfer replay JR1”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3”, or “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” is performed as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. Is determined, the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46 are notified of information for displaying the symbol combination related to “preparation replay” on the active line.

  Further, in the Bonus ready state, when “Bonus rush replay BI1”, “Bonus rush replay BI2”, or “Bonus rush replay BI3” is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the Bonus standby described later is performed. Based on the value stored in the information storage area, the symbol combination related to “First Bonus Replay”, the symbol combination related to “Second Bonus Replay”, and the symbol combination related to “Third Bonus Replay” are placed on the active line. Information for display is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(First Bonus state)
The first Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the first Bonus state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting to shift to the ART ready state, so the interest in the game in the first Bonus state is improved.

  Here, in the first Bonus state, when it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the ART preparation state is performed after the end of the first Bonus state. Further, in the first Bonus state, when it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the first fall standby state is performed after the end of the first Bonus state.

(Second Bonus state)
The second Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the second Bonus state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state as in the first Bonus state. In the present embodiment, the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the ART ready state in the second Bonus state shifts to the ART ready state as compared to the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the ART ready state for the first Bonus state. The probability of being determined is high. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting to shift to the ART preparation state, so that the interest in the game in the second Bonus state is improved.

  Here, in the second Bonus state, when it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the ART preparation state is performed after the end of the second Bonus state. Further, in the second Bonus state, when it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the first fall standby state is performed after the end of the second Bonus state.

(3rd Bonus state)
The third Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, the third Bonus state is different from the first Bonus state and the second Bonus state, and after the third Bonus is finished, control is always performed to shift to the ART preparation state. Thereby, since the player will play a game while expecting to shift to the third Bonus state, the interest in the game is improved. In the present embodiment, the first bonus state, the second bonus state, and the third bonus state can be defined as advantageous game states that shift based on the display of a specific display result.

(First fall standby state)
The first fall standby state is a state in which the transition to the ART ready state is not determined in the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state. Further, in the first fall standby state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. Here, in the first fall standby state, control for shifting to the normal state is performed based on the fact that the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Further, in the first fall standby state, when it is determined as a result of lottery whether or not to shift to the ART ready state, control to shift to the ART ready state is performed. Is called.

  Here, in the first fall standby state, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “press When the “order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, or “push order bell B4” is determined, the combination of symbols related to “bell” is displayed on the active line. This information is not notified. In addition, when “state transition replay” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “normal replay” on the active line is notified. Accordingly, as the winning combination, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order” If “Bell B3” or “Push Order Bell B4” is determined and the symbol combination related to “Bell” cannot be displayed on the effective line, the symbol combination related to “Blank” is the effective line. It will be displayed above and will shift to the normal state.

(ART ready state)
The ART ready state is the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state, and after the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state is finished after it is determined to shift to the ART ready state, or the third Bonus state ART state is finished. It is in a state to shift to the case. Here, in the ART preparation state, control for shifting to the ART state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the ART ready state, when “state transition replay” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “ART replay” on the active line Is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(ART state)
The ART state is an advantageous state for the player. Specifically, in the ART state, when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “bell” on the active line is displayed. Control which notifies by the stop button operation display part 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. In the present embodiment, the ART state can be defined as an advantageous gaming state that shifts based on the display of a specific display result.

  Here, in the ART state, when it is determined to shift to the first added state, control to shift to the first added sign state is performed, and when it is determined to shift to the second added state Is controlled so as to shift to the second added sign state. Further, when the value of an ART state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, control for shifting to the fourth fall standby state is performed.

(First sign of sign)
The first extra sign state is a state that shifts from the ART state to the first additional preparation state. Here, in the first extra sign state, an effect suggesting that the first extra sign state is shifted to the first additional state until the value of a first extra sign state game number counter described later becomes “0” is performed. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to transfer to a 1st addition state. Here, in the first extra sign state, when a value of a first extra sign state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, control for shifting to the first extra preparation state is performed.

(First addition preparation state)
The first add-on preparation state is a state that shifts from the first add-on sign state to the first add-on state. Here, in the first addition preparation state, control for shifting to the first addition state is performed based on the combination of symbols relating to “RUSH replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the first addition preparation state, when “art replay AR2” or “ART replay AR4” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the symbol related to “RUSH replay” Information for displaying the combination on the effective line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(First addition state)
The first added state is a state advantageous for the player, and is a state in which the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added. Specifically, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. Here, in the first added state, control for shifting to the second fall standby state is performed based on the value of a first added state game number counter described later being “0”.

(Second fall standby state)
The second fall standby state is a state before the transition to the ART state after the first addition state is completed. Further, in the second fall standby state, control for shifting to the ART state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the second fall standby state, when “RUSH replay R1” or “RUSH replay R2” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, a combination of symbols related to “ART replay” is selected. Information to be displayed on the active line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(Second sign of sign)
The second surrender sign state is a state that shifts from the ART state to the second surplus preparation state. Here, in the second surrender sign state, an effect that suggests transition to the second surrender state is performed until the value of the second surrender sign game number counter described later becomes “0”. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to transfer to a 2nd addition state. Here, when the value of a game counter for the number of second surrender sign state described later becomes “0” in the second surrender sign state, control for shifting to the second surrender preparation state is performed.

(2nd additional preparation state)
The second add-on preparation state is a state that shifts from the second add-on sign state to the second add-on state. Here, in the second addition preparation state, control for shifting to the second addition state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “special replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the second addition preparation state, when “state transition replay” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, a combination of symbols related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line Is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(Second addition state)
The second added state is a state advantageous for the player, and is a state in which the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added. Specifically, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. Here, in the second added state, control for shifting to the third fall standby state is performed based on the value of a second added state game number counter described later being “0”.

(Third fall standby state)
The third fall standby state is a state before the transition to the ART state after the second addition state ends. Further, in the second fall standby state, control for shifting to the ART state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the third fall standby state, when “winning ART replay AR1”, “ART replay AR2” or “ART replay AR3” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, Information for displaying the symbol combination related to “Replay” on the active line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(4th falling standby state)
The fourth fall standby state is a state that shifts after the ART state ends. Further, in the fourth fall standby state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART state. Here, in the fourth fall standby state, control for shifting to the normal state is performed based on the fact that the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Further, in the fourth fall standby state, when it is determined to shift to the ART state as a result of lottery of whether to shift to the ART state, control to shift to the ART state is performed.

  Here, in the fourth fall standby state, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push” are performed by an internal lottery process described later. When the “order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, or “push order bell B4” is determined, the combination of symbols related to “bell” is displayed on the active line. This information is not notified. In addition, when “state transition replay” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “normal replay” on the active line is notified. Accordingly, as the winning combination, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order” If “Bell B3” or “Push Order Bell B4” is determined and the symbol combination related to “Bell” cannot be displayed on the effective line, the symbol combination related to “Blank” is the effective line. It will be displayed above and will shift to the normal state.

(Direction decision table)
Next, the effect determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for determining effects to be performed in each state managed by the sub control board 400. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. The effect determination table defines conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the sub control board 400.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect determination table includes (a) a normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 24A) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the normal state, and ( b) A chance sign state effect determination table (see FIG. 24B) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is a chance sign state, and (c) the state managed by the sub control board 400. Bonus precursor state effect determination table (see FIG. 24C) used in the case of the Bonus precursor state, and (d) Chance state effect determination used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the chance state. Table (see FIG. 24D) and (e) Bo used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus ready state us preparation state effect determination table (see FIG. 24E) and (f) first Bonus state effect determination table used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first Bonus state (FIG. 24F). )), (G) a second Bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second Bonus state, and (h) managed by the sub control board 400. The third bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state is the third bonus state, and (i) the first used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first fall standby state. A fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) and (j) when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is an ART ready state. An ART preparation state effect determination table (not shown), and (k) an ART state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART state; ) A first added sign state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first add sign state, and (m) the state managed by the sub control board 400. A first addition preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case of the first addition preparation state, and (n) a first state used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first addition state. An added state production determination table (not shown) and (o) a second fall standby state performance used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby state. An outgoing decision table (not shown), and (p) a second added sign state effect determining table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added sign state; q) a second addition preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second addition preparation state, and (r) the state managed by the sub control board 400 Is the second added state effect determination table (not shown) used when the second added state is in the second added state, and (s) the third used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third fall standby state. A fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) and (t) a fourth fall standby state effect determination table used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state. (Not shown) is provided.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table)
Next, the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table includes (a) a Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A) for drawing whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state. b) Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 25B) for drawing whether to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance precursor state, and (c) Bonus in the chance state. A Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 25C) for drawing whether to shift to the preparation state is provided.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (normal state))
The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (normal state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state with a probability of “3276/65536”.

(Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (predicting chance state))
The Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance precursor state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state with a probability of “3276/65536”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance sign state) have the same values as the lottery values defined according to each winning combination. Although it is defined, it is not limited to this, and is defined in the lottery value defined in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state). The lottery value can be set as appropriate.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (chance state))
The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (chance state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for drawing in the chance state whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state with a probability of “6554/65536”.

  Here, comparing the case where a predetermined winning combination is determined in the chance state and the case where the predetermined winning combination is determined in the normal state, the case where the predetermined winning combination is determined in the chance state However, it is defined that the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state is high. In the chance state, even when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to enter the bonus preparation state, while the normal state or chance In the precursor state, when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the chance state has a higher probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state than the normal state or the chance precursor state.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table)
Next, the Bonus state distribution lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus state distribution lottery table includes: (a) a Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) that is referred to when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state. (B) Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 26 (B)) that is referred to when it is decided to shift to the Bonus ready state in the chance precursor state (see FIG. 26 (B)), and (c) chance. In the state, there is provided a Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 26C) that is referred to when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, and the third Bonus It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) includes a lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, a lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and a lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus. It is defined for each winning role that triggered the transition to the ready state. For example, in the normal state, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “24852/65536” The waiting for the second Bonus is determined with a probability of “39858/65536”, and the waiting for the third Bonus is determined with a probability of “826/65536”.

  In the following description, the waiting for the first Bonus, the waiting for the second Bonus, and the waiting for the third Bonus are collectively referred to as “waiting for the Bonus”.

(Bonus status distribution lottery table (predicting chance status))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state in the chance precursor state, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, It is provided to determine any of the third Bonus waiting. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance predictor state) includes a lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, a lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and a lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus. It is defined for each winning combination that triggered the transition to the Bonus ready state. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process described later in the sign of chance and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “24852/65536”. , Waiting for the second Bonus is determined with a probability of “39858/65536”, and waiting for the third Bonus is determined with a probability of “826/65536”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) have the same values as the lottery values defined according to each winning combination. Although defined, it is not limited to this, and is defined in the lottery values defined in the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state). The lottery value can be set as appropriate.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance state, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, and the third Bonus It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) includes a lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, a lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and a lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus. It is defined for each winning role that triggered the transition to the ready state. For example, in the chance state, when the “push order bell” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “35768/65536”. Then, waiting for the second Bonus is determined with a probability of “29749/65536”, and waiting for the third Bonus is determined with a probability of “19/65536”.

(Predictor game number determination table)
Next, the precursor game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The precursor game number determination table is (a) a Bonus precursor game number determination table for determining the number of games to be played in the Bonus precursor state when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state (FIG. 27 ( A) see) and (b) a chance precursor game number determination table for determining the number of games to be played in the chance precursor state when it is determined to shift to the chance state in the normal state (see FIG. 27 (B)), and (c) a first number for determining the number of games to be played in the first additional sign state when it is determined to shift to the first additional state in the ART state. When the sign of the number of signs of addition sign-up (see FIG. 27C) and (d) the ART state is determined to shift to the second addition state, Allowed and a second plus aura game number determination table for determining the number of games to be able to game with aura state (see FIG. 27 (D)).

(Bonus precursor game number determination table)
The Bonus precursor game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. (a) In the normal state, as a result of performing the lottery using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A), When it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state, (b) in the chance precursor state, a lottery is performed using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 25B). When it is determined to shift to the preparation state, it is provided to determine the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state. Here, in the Bonus precursor game number determination table, a lottery value of the Bonus precursor game number is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, “5” game is determined as the number of Bonus precursor games with a probability of “49152/65536”. “10” game is determined as the number of Bonus precursor games with the probability of “8192/65536”, and “15” game is determined as the number of Bonus precursor games with the probability of “8192/65536”. The determined number of Bonus precursor games is set to the value of a Bonus precursor state game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Chance precursor game number determination table)
The chance sign game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the normal state, as a result of lottery using a chance state shift lottery table (see FIG. 28) described later, it is determined to shift to the chance state. Is provided to determine the number of games until the chance state is entered. Here, the chance precursor game number determination table defines a lottery value of the number of chance precursor games for each winning combination determined to shift to the chance state. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the chance state, “3” game is determined as the number of chance precursor games with the probability of “49152/65536” The game number “6” is determined as the chance precursor game number with the probability of “8192/65536”, and the game number “9” is determined as the chance precursor game number with the probability of “8192/65536”. The determined chance precursor game number is set to a value of a chance precursor state game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(First extra sign game number determination table)
The first extra sign game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. As a result of lottery using the first extra state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) described later in the ART state, When it is determined to shift to the added state, it is provided to determine the number of games until the shift to the first added state. Here, in the first extra sign game number determination table, a lottery value of the first extra sign game number is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the first extra state. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the first additional state, “2” game is set as the first additional harbinger game number with a probability of “32768/65536”. Is determined, and “4” games are determined as the number of first extra sign games with a probability of “32768/65536”. Note that the determined first extra sign game number is set to a value of a first extra sign state game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Second extra sign game number determination table)
The second extra sign game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. As a result of lottery using the second extra state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) described later in the ART state, When it is determined to shift to the added state, it is provided for determining the number of games until shifting to the second added state. Here, the lottery value of the number of second extra sign game is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the second extra state in the second extra sign game number determination table. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined by the internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to shift to the second added state, “2” is set as the number of second added precursor games with a probability of “16384/65536”. The game is determined, the game number “4” is determined as the number of the second sign-on game with the probability of “16384/65536”, and the game number “6” is determined as the number of the second sign-up game with the probability of “16384/65536”. , “8” games are determined as the number of second sign-on games with the probability of “16384/65536”. It should be noted that the determined second extra sign game number is set to a value of a later-described second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Chance state transition lottery table)
Next, the chance state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The chance state transition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the chance state in the normal state. Specifically, in the chance state transfer lottery table, lottery values that will shift to the chance state for each winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the chance state with a probability of “3276/65536”.

(Fake game number determination table)
Next, the fake game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The fake game number determination table (a) in the normal state, the normal state fake game number determination table for determining the number of games in which the production is expected to shift to the Bonus preparation state (see FIG. 29A). ) And (b) in the ART state, the ART state fake game number determination table (FIG. 29 (FIG. 29)) for determining the number of games in which the production is expected to shift to the first additional state or the second additional state. B)).

(Normal Fake Game Number Determination Table)
The normal state fake game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. As a result of performing lottery using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A) in the normal state, the bonus is determined. It is provided to determine the number of games in which an effect is expected to make a transition to the Bonus preparation state when it is not determined to enter the preparation state. Here, in the normal state fake game number determination table, a lottery value of the number of fake precursor games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and it is not determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, “5” game is determined as the number of fake precursor games with a probability of “49152/65536” Then, “10” games are determined as the number of fake omens with the probability of “8192/65536”, and “15” games are determined as the number of precluded games with the probability of “8192/65536”. Note that the determined number of fake omen games is set to a value of a fake game number counter (described later) provided in the sub RAM 403.

(Art state fake game number determination table)
The ART state fake game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the ART state, a first added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) described later and a second added state transition lottery table described later (see FIG. 34A). As a result of performing the lottery using FIG. 34 (B), when it is not determined to shift to the first added state and the second added state, the state shifts to the first added state or the second added state. It is provided to determine the number of games in which an effect that is expected to be performed is performed. Here, in the ART state fake game number determination table, a lottery value of the number of ART state fake games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process to be described later and it is not determined to shift to the first added state and the second added state, the fake for the ART state has a probability of “49152/65536”. “1” game is determined as the number of games, “3” game is determined as the number of ART state fake precursor games with a probability of “8192/65536”, and the number of fake precursor games for ART state with a probability of “8192/65536” As a result, “5” game is determined. The determined ART state fake predictive game number is set to the value of an ART state fake game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Promotional lottery table)
Next, the promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The promotion lottery table is: (a) a promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) used for lottery whether to promote during the second Bonus standby or the third Bonus standby during the first Bonus standby (FIG. 30 ( A) (refer to FIG. 30 (B)), and (b) during the second Bonus standby, the promotion lottery table (second Bonus standby) used when drawing whether or not to promote during the third Bonus standby (see FIG. 30 (B)). I have.

(Promotional lottery table (waiting for 1st Bonus))
The promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is promoted while waiting for the second Bonus or waiting for the third Bonus when the Bonus precursor state or the Bonus preparation state is waiting for the first Bonus. It is provided to draw whether or not to make it. Specifically, a lottery value that is promoted during the second Bonus standby and a lottery value that is promoted during the third Bonus standby are defined for each winning combination in the promotion lottery table (while waiting for the first Bonus). For example, when “weak cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the player is promoted during the second Bonus standby with a probability of “12785/65536”, and the third Bonus with a probability of “24/65536”. You will be promoted while waiting.

(Promotional lottery table (waiting for 2nd Bonus))
The promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the Bonus precursor state or the Bonus ready state, when the second Bonus is waiting, whether or not to promote during the third Bonus waiting is determined by lottery. Is provided to do. Specifically, a lottery value to be promoted during the third Bonus standby is defined for each winning combination in the promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second Bonus). For example, when “weak cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the player is promoted during the third Bonus standby with a probability of “24/65536”.

  In addition, during the first Bonus standby, when one of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts to the first Bonus state. Further, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line while waiting for the second Bonus, the state shifts to the second Bonus state. When any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line while waiting for the third Bonus, the state is shifted to the third Bonus state. For this reason, the waiting time for the third Bonus is most advantageous for the player compared to the waiting time for the first Bonus and the waiting time for the second Bonus. Therefore, the promotion lottery is not performed while waiting for the third Bonus.

(ART preparation state transfer lottery table)
Next, the ART preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART ready state transition lottery table is (a) the first Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table used in the first Bonus state to determine whether to shift to the ART ready state (see FIG. 31A). ) And (b) a second Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31B) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the second Bonus state. .

(First Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table)
The first Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the first Bonus state. Specifically, the lottery value for shifting to the ART ready state for each winning combination is defined in the first Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the ART ready state with a probability of “4096/65536”.

(Second Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table)
The second Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the second Bonus state. Specifically, in the second bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table, a lottery value that shifts to the ART ready state for each winning combination is defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the ART ready state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(ART state number of games added lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 32, the ART state game number addition lottery table will be described.

  The ART state number-of-games extra lottery table is: (a) In the third Bonus state, an ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (No. 1) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. (3 Bonus state) (see FIG. 32 (A)) and (b) In the ART ready state, or in the ART state used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. The number of games added lottery table (ART ready state / ART state) (see FIG. 32B), and (c) the number of games that can be played in the ART state in the first additional sign state and the second additional sign state The number of ART state games used in the lottery to determine whether or not to be added, and a lottery table (precursor status) (see FIG. 32C), and (d) first upper In the preparation state or the second addition preparation state, the ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (addition preparation state) used when the lottery of whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed (FIG. 32). (See (D)), and (e) In the first added state, an ART state number-of-games addition lottery table (first added amount) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. (State) (see FIG. 32E) and (f) in the second added state, the number of games for the ART state used in the lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Table (second added state) (see FIG. 32F) and (g) used in lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state in the second fall standby state. Whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state in the ART state game number addition lottery table (second fall standby state) (see FIG. 32G) and (h) the third fall standby state A lottery table (third fall standby state) (see FIG. 32 (G)) added to the number of games for ART state used when performing the lottery.

(ART state game number extra lottery table (3rd Bonus state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (third Bonus state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and after the third Bonus state ends, is the number of games that can be played in the ART state transferred through the ART ready state added? It is provided to make a lottery of no. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (third Bonus state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Number of games for ART state addition lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (ART ready state / ART state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the ART ready state or ART state, It is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, the lottery table for adding the number of games for ART state (ART preparation state / ART state) defines a lottery value for the number of additional games for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Art state game number extra lottery table (precursor extra state))
The ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (preliminary sign state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the first extra sign state and the second extra sign state. Thus, it is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state game number extra lottery table (preliminary sign state), the lottery value of the extra game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Number of games for ART state addition lottery table (addition preparation state))
The ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (upper preparation state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the first extra preparation state and the second extra preparation state. Thus, it is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(ART state game number extra lottery table (first extra state))
The number-of-arts game extra lottery table (first extra state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the first extra state, games can be played in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games. Specifically, in the ART state game number extra lottery table (first extra state), the lottery value of the extra game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” The “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, and the “300” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “16384/65536”.

(ART state game number extra lottery table (second extra state))
The ART state game number extra lottery table (second extra state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the second extra state, it is possible to play in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games. Specifically, in the ART state game number extra lottery table (second extra state), the lottery value of the extra game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “16384/65536”, and “16384/65536” The “200” game is determined as the number of additional games by the probability, and the “300” game is determined as the additional number of games at the probability of “32768/65536”.

(ART state number of games added lottery table (second fall standby state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (second fall standby state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the second fall standby state. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (second fall standby state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(ART state number of games added lottery table (third fall standby state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (third fall standby state) is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the third fall standby state, in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (third fall standby state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Withdrawal lottery table)
Next, the pull-back lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The pull-back lottery table is (a) a first lottery standby state pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33A) that is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART ready state in the first roll-down standby state. ) And (b) in the fourth fall standby state, a fourth fall standby state pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33 (B)) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART state is provided. Yes.

(Retraction lottery table for the first fall standby state)
The first fall standby state pull-out lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the first fall standby state. Specifically, in the first fall standby state withdrawal lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the ART ready state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “successful play” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state with a probability of “4096/65536”.

(Fourth lottery table for the 4th falling standby state)
The fourth fall standby state pull-out lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART state in the fourth fall standby state. Specifically, in the fourth falling standby state withdrawal lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the ART state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “successful play” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the ART state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(Additional state transfer lottery table)
Next, the added state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The added state transition lottery table includes (a) a first added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34 (A)) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the first added state, and (b) second. A second added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the added state is provided.

(First addition state transition lottery table)
The first added state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the first added state in the ART state. Specifically, in the first added state transition lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the first added state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “strong cherry” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the first added state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(Second addition state transition lottery table)
The second added state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the second added state in the ART state. Specifically, in the second added state transition lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the second added state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the second added state with a probability of “32768/65536”.

(Command list)
Here, a part of commands transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 in the present embodiment will be described based on FIG. 109 and FIG.

(Command classification A)
First, the command classification A in FIGS. 109 and 110 will be described. 109 and 110, “first” represents the first command of the transmission commands, and “second” represents the second command of the transmission commands. “Name” represents the command name, “Content” represents the command content, “Command Set Timing” represents the command setting timing, and “Sum Value” It represents the checksum value calculated for the command.

(Setting value specification command)
First, the “setting value designation command” is a command indicating a setting value set in the gaming machine 1, and in this embodiment, six types “setting 1” to “setting 6” are defined. The set value designation command is set in a game start management process described later. Further, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the six types of commands.

(Main chip code 1 command to main chip code 5 command)
Next, the “main chip code 1 command” is a command indicating a part of the main chip ID, and the “main chip code 2 command” is a command indicating a part of the main chip ID. The “code 3 command” is a command indicating a part of the main chip ID, the “main chip code 4 command” is a command indicating a part of the main chip ID, and the “main chip code 5 command” is , A command indicating a part of the main chip ID. More precisely, the main chip ID information is composed of “main chip code 1 command” to “main chip code 4 command”, and one of each of “main chip code 1 command” to “main chip code 4 command”. The command generated using the data of the part is “main chip code 5 command”. The main chip code 1 command to main chip code 5 command are set in the game start management process described later. Further, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the five types of commands.

(Game start command)
Next, the “game start command” is a command indicating that a game has started (unit game has started). In this embodiment, seven types of “non-RT” to “RT6” are included. It has been established. The game start command is set in a game start management process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the seven types of commands.

(Medal automatic insertion command)
Next, the “medal automatic insertion command” is a command indicating that a medal has been automatically inserted, and in this embodiment, one type of “three automatic insertion” is defined. The medal automatic insertion command is set in a medal acceptance start process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to the command.

(Medal insertion command)
Next, the “medal insertion command” is a command indicating that a medal has been inserted. In the present embodiment, there are three types, “1 sheet insertion”, “2 sheet insertion”, and “3 sheet insertion”. It has been established. The medal insertion command is set in a medal insertion check process or a stored medal insertion process described later. The calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the three types of commands.

(Set value display command)
Next, the “set value display command” is a command for displaying the set value. In this embodiment, two types of “set value display start” and “set value display end” are defined. The set value display command is set in a set value display process described later. The calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the two types of commands.

(Checkout command)
Next, the “settlement command” is a command indicating settlement of game medals, and in this embodiment, two types of “settlement start” and “settlement end” are defined. The settlement command is set in a medal management process described later. The calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the two types of commands.

(Game state type command)
Next, the “gaming state type command” is a command indicating the type of gaming state, and in this embodiment, seven types “non-RT” to “RT6” are defined. The game state type command is set by a symbol code setting process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the seven types of commands.

(Reel rotation start acceptance command)
Next, the “reel rotation start acceptance command” is a command indicating acceptance of the reel rotation start. In the present embodiment, “in the case of 1 inserted medal”, “in the case of 2 inserted medals”, and “inserted medal 3”. Three types of “sheet time” are determined. The reel rotation start acceptance command is set in a symbol code setting process described later. The calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the three types of commands. In addition, in a game machine dedicated to a three-seat game, only a command corresponding to “three inserted medals” is transmitted, and in a gaming machine which can hang one or two, “three inserted medals” And a command corresponding to “when one inserted medal” and “when two inserted medals” may be transmitted.

(Condition device command)
Next, the “condition device command” is a command indicating information related to the winning combination, and in this embodiment, 40 types corresponding to the winning numbers “00” to “39” shown in FIG. 12 are determined. It has been. The condition device command is set in a symbol code setting process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the 40 types of commands. In FIG. 12, for the winning numbers “00” to “39”, the condition device corresponding to the winning number is defined in the “condition device” column. For example, if the winning number is “05” “direct hit Bonus”, “REP02 + 03 + 04” is defined as the corresponding condition device. Accordingly, the “condition device command” is transmitted as a command indicating the winning number and the condition device corresponding to the winning number in FIG.

(Rotation effect lottery command)
Next, the “rotation effect lottery command” is a command indicating the lottery result of the rotation effect, and in this embodiment, “no rotation effect”, “rotation effect 1”, “rotation effect 2”. ”,“ Rotation effect 3 ”,“ Rotation effect 4 ”,“ Rotation effect 5 ”, and“ Long freeze ”are defined. Note that the spinning effect lottery command is set in a symbol code setting process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the seven types of commands.

(Reel rotation start command)
Next, the “reel rotation start command” is a command indicating the start of reel rotation. In the present embodiment, one type of “reel rotation start” is defined. The reel rotation start command is set in a reel rotation start preparation process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to the command.

(Cylinder effect execution command)
Next, the “rotation effect execution command” is a command indicating execution of the rotation effect, and in this embodiment, “no rotation effect”, “rotation effect 1”, “rotation effect 2”. Seven types of "rotation effect 3", "rotation effect 4", "rotation effect 5", and "long freeze" are defined. Note that the spinning effect execution command is set in the effect setting process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the seven types of commands. In addition, in this embodiment, although comprised so that a rotation effect lottery command and a rotation effect execution command may be transmitted, for example, when a rotation effect is completed in one game, a rotation effect lottery command, Any one of the rotation effect execution commands may be transmitted. Further, when executing the spinning effect over two games, for example, a spinning effect lottery command may be transmitted in the first game and a spinning effect execution command may be transmitted in the second game.

(Slide command)
Next, the “sliding frame command” is a command indicating the number of sliding frames of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20, and in this embodiment, “when sliding 0 frame”, “when sliding 1 frame” ”,“ 2 frames sliding ”,“ 3 frames sliding ”, and“ 4 frames sliding ”are defined. The slip frame command is set in a reel stop process described later. Further, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the five types of commands.

(Press position command)
Next, the “pressing position command” is a command indicating the pressing position of the symbol at the reference position of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. In this embodiment, 21 commands shown in FIG. 21 types corresponding to the symbol positions are defined. The pressed position command is set in a reel stop process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the 21 types of commands.

(Pressing swivel command)
Next, the “pressing roll command” means the left stop button 11 corresponding to the pressed left reel 18, the middle stop button 12 corresponding to the pressed middle reel 19, and the right corresponding to the pressed right reel 20. This is a command indicating the stop button 13, and in this embodiment, three types of “left turn press”, “middle turn press”, and “right turn press” are defined. Note that the command for the pressing cylinder command is set in a reel stop process described later. The calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the three types of commands.

(Stop Cylinder command)
Next, the “stop spinning command” is a command indicating the stopped left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20. In the present embodiment, “stop left spinning”, “stop middle spinning” ”And“ Right-cylinder stop ”are defined. The stop spinning command is set in a reel stop process described later. The calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the three types of commands.

(Display judgment command)
Next, the “display determination command” is a command that indicates a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, “normal replay and blank display are not displayed”, “preparation state transition replay”, and “Bonus inrush replay” are displayed. "BI1", "Bonus rush replay BI2", "Bonus rush replay BI3", "ART in-game replay", "RUSH replay", "State transition replay", "Middle stage replay", "Right-up replay", "Special symbol alignment" 18 types of “upper watermelon”, “lower watermelon”, “upper cherry”, “lower cherry”, “chance eye replay CR1”, “chance eye replay CR2”, and “blank” are defined. The display determination command is set in a display determination process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the 18 types of commands.

(Game end command)
Next, the “game end command” is a command indicating that the game is ended (unit game is ended). In this embodiment, seven types of “non-RT” to “RT6” are included. It has been established. The game end command is set in a game state transition process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the seven types of commands.

(Game medal payout start command)
Next, the “game medal payout start command” is a command indicating the start of payout of game medals. In this embodiment, “1 payout”, “2 payout”, “5 payout”, “9” Four types of “sheet delivery” are defined. The game medal payout start command is set in a payout process described later. Also, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to each of the four types of commands.

(Game medal payout end command)
Next, the “game medal payout end command” is a command indicating the end of game medal payout. In the present embodiment, one type of “game medal payout end” is defined. The game medal payout end command is set in a payout process described later. In addition, the calculated sum value is determined so as to correspond to the command.

(Command classification B)
Next, the command classification B will be described using a part of FIG.

  The “checksum transmission command” indicated by the command classification B is a command indicating the sum of the sum values of the commands indicated by the command classification A described above, and one type of “total of checksum values” is defined. ing. Note that the checksum transmission command is set in a checksum related process described later. Since the checksum transmission command is a command indicating the sum of the sum values of the commands indicated by the command classification A, the sum value is not calculated for the checksum value transmission command.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S <b> 1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not power is interrupted. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power interruption state, and when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 1 is cut off by the backup power source is performed. If it is determined that the power is interrupted (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not interrupted (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM checksum calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 303, and when the calculation is completed, performs processing for setting the checksum of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S3 ends, the process proceeds to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. In the present embodiment, the setting change key switch 49sw is turned on when the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48 and rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, in step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted in the setting change key hole 48. When it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S5, and when it is determined that the setting change key switch is OFF (step S4). = No), the processing shifts to a power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption and the value of the saved stack pointer.

  When the power interruption recovery process is completed, the game machine 1 returns to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor is ON. In the present embodiment, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened by a predetermined angle or more, whereby the door opening / closing sensor 17s is turned on. It becomes. Therefore, in step S5, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened at a predetermined angle or more. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is ON (step S5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S7, and if it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is OFF (step S5 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag. Specifically, when the setting change key switch is ON (step S4 = Yes) and the door opening / closing sensor 17s is OFF (step S5 = No), the front door 3 is not opened more than a predetermined angle. Regardless, it is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted. For this reason, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag in a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And when the process of step S6 is complete | finished, a process is transfered to the electric power interruption return process mentioned above.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change start command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change start command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change start command” is a command having information or the like indicating that the gaming machine 1 is turned on and starts changing the setting value. Then, when the process of step S7 ends, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs setting processing for transmitting the setting change start command in step S7, and describes the checksum value (hereinafter referred to as “sum value”) for the setting change start command. And so on. Then, when the process of step S8 ends, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the current set value, determines whether or not the range of the set value is normal, and when the determination result is normal, the stored number indicator 28, Processing for displaying the current set value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. On the other hand, when the above determination result is not normal, processing for setting the initial setting value of the setting value in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. The main CPU 301 performs a setting value switching process based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 45 by the setting change switch 45sw, and also detects that the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. Based on this, the setting value is determined, and the setting value is stored in the main RAM 303 when it is detected that the setting changing key rotated by a predetermined angle has been rotated to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed. Processing to store in the set value storage area provided is performed. Then, when the process of step S9 ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming the write data in the main RAM 303 and processing for initializing the main RAM 303, and in the accumulated sum value storage area of the main RAM 303 described in detail later with reference to FIG. Performs processing such as clearing the stored cumulative sum value. Then, when the process of step S10 ends, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change end command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change end command” is a command having information indicating that the setting value has been changed and information related to the changed setting value. Then, when the process of step S11 ends, the process proceeds to step S12.

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 301 performs a control command set process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs setting processing for transmitting the setting change end command in step S11, and performs processing for calculating a sum value for the setting change end command. Then, when the process of step S12 ends, the process proceeds to step S13.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor 17s is OFF. If it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is OFF (step S13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S14, and if it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is not OFF (step S13 = No). ), And the process proceeds to step S15.

(Step S14)
In step S14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a door close command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the door close command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door close command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “door close command” is a command having information indicating that the front door 3 is closed. Then, when the process of step S14 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 36).

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a door open command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the door open command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door open command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “door open command” is a command having information indicating that the front door 3 is open. Then, when the process of step S15 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 36).

(Main chip ID)
Here, the main chip ID recorded (defined) on the main chip mounted on the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 108, (a) shows information assigned to each game machine, and (b) shows information managed by a server or the like on the administrator side.

  First, (a) “model name” described in the information assigned to each gaming machine represents the model name of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. FIG. 108 shows that there are a plurality of the same models. Next, “main chip ID (4-byte configuration)” indicates a main chip ID recorded (defined) on the main chip mounted on the main control board 300 in each gaming machine. The main chip ID is composed of 4-byte data, but for the convenience of explanation, it is expressed by “ID: AAAA”. Next, the “collation ID stored in the sub-RAM” is based on the main chip ID recorded (defined) on the main chip mounted on the main control board 300. The sub control board 400 that has received the information is the main chip ID information stored in the sub RAM 403. In this embodiment, the information of the main chip ID is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 in each game, and the sub control board 400 and the verification ID stored in the sub RAM 403 It is configured to perform collation and determine whether or not the IDs match. The “calculated sum value” indicates a checksum value calculated for the main chip ID. For example, the sum value calculated for “ID: AAAA” is “1”, and the sum value calculated for “ID: BBBB” is “2”.

  In other words, even for the same model, the main chip ID recorded (determined) on the main chip mounted on the main control board 300 in each game machine has a unique (serial number). In addition, the checksum value calculated for this unique main chip ID is also a unique value.

  Next, as a matter described in (b) information managed by the server on the manager side, a matter “shipping destination game store” is newly provided. The “shipment destination game store” is, for example, information on which game store the game machine 1 is shipped at the time of shipment of the game machine 1 based on the input by the administrator of the game machine 1. By recording such information in association with the main chip ID information, it becomes easy to grasp the relationship between the main chip ID and the shipping destination game store.

(Main loop processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the main loop process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address and the initialization end address of the main RAM 303, and then initializes from the initialization start address to the initialization end address area of the main RAM 303. Processing for initializing the area is performed. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets a command indicating a set value, and information on the main chip ID recorded (defined) on the main chip mounted on the main control board 300. A process for setting a command to be transmitted to a game, a process for setting a command indicating the start of a game, a value of a throw-in number counter provided in the main RAM 303, a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 And the process of clearing the value in the press reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the operable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs a medal acceptance start process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a command indicating automatic insertion of medals, processing for automatically inserting medals when a later-described re-game operation flag is ON, and the like. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs a set value confirmation process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 when the medal has not been inserted and the setting change key switch 49sw is ON. A process of displaying the value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. Then, when the process of step S104 ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal is inserted into the medal slot 6 when a later-described re-game operation flag is not ON, and when a medal is inserted into the medal slot 6. The process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, whether or not the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is detected, and the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 are detected. When it is detected, it is determined whether or not the process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, and the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected. Processing for returning stored medals to the player, and processing for setting a command indicating the start of payment when an operation of the payment button 9 is detected When the settlement is finished, the processing for setting a command indicating the settlement completion. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S <b> 106, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 has become “3” by the medal acceptance start process in step S103 and the medal management process in step S105. Process. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107, and it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3”. In that case (step S106 = No), the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S108 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109. If it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S108 = No), The process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning combination by lottery. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs a symbol code setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 acquires a stop control number based on the winning combination determined by the process of step S109 and stores it in a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303, or a game state type The process which sets the command which shows, the process which sets the command which shows reel rotation start reception, the process which sets the command which shows a spinning drum lottery, the process which sets the command which shows a condition apparatus, etc. are performed. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a minimum game time, a process for setting a command indicating the start of reel rotation, and the like. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs reel stop pre-processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process for the rotating left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation flag setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information indicating that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating in a reel information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to turn off the operable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the operable state flag corresponding to the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 detects that the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw, and right stop switch 13sw have detected a stop operation on the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. Then, processing for stopping the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 have stopped based on the value of the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped (step S118 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119. If it is determined that all the reels are not stopped (step S118 = No), The process proceeds to step S117, and the same process is repeated until all reels stop.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a command indicating display determination, a process for calculating the number of payouts according to a combination of winning symbols, and the like. Then, when the process of step S119 ends, the process proceeds to step S120.

(Step S120)
In step S120, the main CPU 301 performs payout processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the hopper 202 through the power supply board 200 based on the combination of symbols related to “winning” being displayed on the activated line, Processing for setting a command indicating the start of paying out medals, processing for setting a command indicating the end of paying out medals, and the like are performed. Then, when the process of step S120 ends, the process proceeds to step S121.

(Step S121)
In step S121, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for shifting the RT gaming state, a process for setting a command indicating the end of the game, and the like based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121 ends, the process proceeds to step S122.

(Step S122)
In step S122, the main CPU 301 performs checksum-related processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a command for transmitting the calculated sum value to the sub-control board 400. When the process of step S122 ends, the process proceeds to step S101, and the main loop process is repeatedly executed.

(Game start management process)
Next, based on FIG. 37, the game start management process performed by the process of step S102 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a subroutine of game start management processing.

(Step S102-1)
In step S102-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting value designation command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the setting value designation command to the sub control board 400 based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. A process for setting the set value designation command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Performs processing to set a setting value specification command. Then, when the process of step S102-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-2.

(Step S102-2)
In step S102-2, the main CPU 301 performs a control command set process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the setting value designation command in step S102-1. Then, when the process of step S102-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-3.

(Step S102-3)
In step S102-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an initial value of the chip code. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting respective initial values of main chip codes (main chip code 1 to main chip code 4 shown in FIG. 109) composed of 4 bytes. Then, when the process of step S102-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-4.

(Step S102-4)
In step S102-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an initial value of the fifth command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 responds to the main chip code 5 (corresponding to the fifth command) generated based on the main chip code composed of 4 bytes (main chip code 1 to main chip code 4 shown in FIG. 109). ) Is set (initial value “0” in the register). Then, when the process of step S102-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-5.

(Step S102-5)
In step S102-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a main chip ID command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the main chip code 1 command corresponding to the main chip code 1 to the sub-control board 400, so that the main chip code 1 command is provided in the main RAM 303. To set in the transmission data storage area. Then, when the process of step S102-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-6.

(Step S102-6)
In step S102-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a chip code. Specifically, the main CPU 301 corresponds to the main chip code to be transmitted in order to transmit a main chip code composed of 4 bytes (main chip code 1 to main chip code 4 shown in FIG. 109) byte by byte. Performs processing to set the chip code. Then, when the process of step S102-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-7.

(Step S102-7)
In step S102-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of correcting the chip code. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for correcting 1-byte (8-bit) data of the main chip code to be transmitted into 7-bit data for transmission. Then, when the process of step S102-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-8.

(Step S102-8)
In step S102-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a chip code command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the command corresponding to the main chip code to be transmitted to the sub-control board 400 so that the command corresponding to the main chip code to be transmitted is provided in the main RAM 303. To set in the transmission data storage area. Then, when the process of step S102-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-9.

(Step S102-9)
In step S102-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of sliding the remaining 1 bit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of sliding the bits of the set main chip code in order to generate main chip code 5 data from the set main chip code. The main chip code 5 data is configured to be generated based on the most significant bit data of each main chip code 1 to 4. That is, by performing the process of sliding one bit, the most significant bit data is slid to the main chip code 5 data, and the most significant bit data is acquired as the main chip code 5 data. Then, when the process of step S102-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-10.

(Step S102-10)
In step S102-10, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the first command in step S102-8. Then, when the process of step S102-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-11.

(Step S102-11)
In step S102-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the main chip code. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the address of the main chip code data set so as to transmit the main chip code composed of 4 bytes (main chip code 1 to main chip code 4 shown in FIG. 109) one byte at a time. The process of setting the next address is performed. Then, when the process of step S102-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-12.

(Step S102-12)
In step S102-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of incrementing the main chip code command. More specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the main chip code composed of 4 bytes (main chip code 1 to main chip code 4 shown in FIG. 109) one byte at a time. Performs processing to set the next address. Then, when the process of step S102-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-13.

(Step S102-13)
In step S102-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not transmission of all commands has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not transmission of all the commands of the main chip code commands 1 to 4 has been completed. When it is determined that transmission of all the commands of the main chip code commands 1 to 4 has been completed (step S102-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S102-14, and the main chip code commands 1 to 4 are transferred. If it is determined that the transmission of all the commands 4 has not been completed (step S102-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S102-6.

(Step S102-14)
In step S102-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the upper and lower 4 bits of the main chip code 5 data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 changes the uppermost data of the main chip codes 1 to 4 stored in the upper bits of the main chip code 5 data to the lower bits of the main chip code 5 data (upper 4 bits Is transferred to the lower 4 bits). Then, when the process of step S102-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-15.

(Step S102-15)
In step S102-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a chip ID5 command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the main chip code 5 command corresponding to the chip ID 5 command to the sub-control board 400, and the main chip code 5 command is provided for the effect provided in the main RAM 303. Performs processing to set in the transmission data storage area. Then, when the process of step S102-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-16.

(Step S102-16)
In step S102-16, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the main chip code 5 command in step S102-15. Then, when the process of step S102-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-17.

(Step S102-17)
In step S102-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a game start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 uses a game start command to transmit a command indicating the value of the game state storage area to the sub-control board 400 based on the value of the game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Is set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S102-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-18.

(Step S102-18)
In step S102-18, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a game start command in step S102-17. Then, when the process of step S102-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S102-19.

(Step S102-19)
In step S102-19, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the RT type. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the RT type based on the value of the game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S102-19 ends, the game start management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S103 of the main loop process.

(Medal reception start processing)
Next, the medal acceptance start process performed by the process of step S103 in FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 38 shows a subroutine for medal acceptance start processing.

(Step S103-1)
In step S103-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game in-operation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game operation flag is ON based on the value of the re-game operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the re-game operating flag is ON (step S103-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S103-2, and it is determined that the re-game operating flag is not ON. In this case (step S103-1 = No), the medal acceptance start process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main loop process.

(Step S103-2)
In step S103-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic charging initial timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “355” to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 in order to provide a standby time for automatically inserting medals used in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S103-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S103-3.

(Step S103-3)
In step S103-3, the main CPU 301 performs timer wait processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of waiting until the value set in the timer counter becomes “0” by the process of step S103-2 or the process of step S103-8 described later. Then, when the process of step S103-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S103-4.

(Step S103-4)
In step S103-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the re-game display lamp is lit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the re-game display lamp lighting flag in the lamp-related data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, so that the re-game display lamp 31 is on. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the regame display lamp is lit (step S103-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S103-7, and it is determined that the regame display lamp is not lit. In this case (step S103-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S103-5.

(Step S103-5)
In step S103-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic medal insertion command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the medal automatic insertion command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the automatic medal insertion command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “medal automatic insertion command” is a command having information indicating that a medal used in the previous game is automatically inserted. Then, when the process of step S103-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S103-6.

(Step S103-6)
In step S103-6, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting an automatic medal insertion command in step S103-5. Then, when the process of step S103-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S103-7.

(Step S103-7)
In step S103-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 with the upper limit being the number of medals used in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S103-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S103-8.

(Step S103-8)
In step S103-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds “1” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S103-7, and as a result, the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is obtained. It is determined whether or not “3” has been reached. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S103-8 = Yes), the medal acceptance start process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S104 of the main loop process. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3” (step S103-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S103-9.

(Step S103-9)
In step S103-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic insertion interval timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “71” to a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 in order to provide an interval for automatically inserting medals used in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S103-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S103-3.

(Setting value confirmation process)
Next, the setting value confirmation process performed by the process of step S104 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a subroutine for setting value confirmation processing.

(Step S104-1)
In step S <b> 104-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining the number of inserted sheets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S104-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a medal has been inserted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a medal has been inserted from the value of the inserted number counter acquired in the process of step S104-1. If it is determined that a medal has been inserted (step S104-2 = Yes), the subroutine for the set value confirmation process is terminated, the process proceeds to step S105 of the main loop process, and the medal has been inserted. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S104-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-3.

(Step S104-3)
In step S <b> 104-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring door opening / closing data from the input port 1. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring input data of a door opening / closing sensor signal from the input port 1 input from the status board 100. Then, when the process of step S104-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S104-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor signal is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor signal is ON from the input data of the door opening / closing sensor signal acquired in the process of step S104-3. When it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor signal is ON (step S104-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104-5, and when it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor signal is not ON. (Step S104-4 = No) ends the subroutine for the set value confirmation processing, and shifts the processing to Step S105 of the main loop processing.

(Step S104-5)
In step S <b> 104-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring setting key data from the input port 1. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining input data of the setting key switch 1 and the setting key switch 2 from the input port 1 input from the setting switch board 250. Then, when the process of step S104-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not both the setting key switch 1 and the setting key switch 2 are ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether both the setting key switch 1 and the setting key switch 2 are ON based on the input data of the setting key switch 1 and the setting key switch 2 acquired in the process of step S104-6. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that both the setting key switch 1 and the setting key switch 2 are ON (step S104-6 = Yes), the setting value confirmation processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop processing proceeds to step S105. If it is determined that both the setting key switch 1 and the setting key switch 2 are not ON (step S104-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-7. The setting key switch 1 detects a turning state in which the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and then the setting key is turned to the turning position, and the setting key switch 2 sets the setting key. Detects the insertion state inserted into the key insertion slot. That is, the state in which both the setting key switch 1 and the setting key switch 2 are ON indicates a state in which the setting key is located between the rotation state and the insertion state.

(Step S104-7)
In step S104-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON based on the setting key switch signal input from the setting switch board 250. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (step S104-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104-8, and when it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not ON. (Step S104-7 = No), the subroutine for the set value confirmation process is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S105 of the main loop process.

(Step S104-8)
In step S104-8, the main CPU 301 performs a set value display process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring current setting value data and displaying the current setting value on the setting display unit 44. When the process of step S104-8 ends, the set value confirmation process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S105 of the main loop process.

  The set value is a value set in the gaming machine 1 by the manager of the game store, and is composed of, for example, six levels from setting 1 to setting 6 as shown in FIG. . As shown in FIG. 20, the lottery value for the winning combination is different between setting 1 and setting 6. In general, setting 6 is more advantageous for the player than setting 1.

(Set value display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 40, the setting value display process performed by the process of step S104-8 of FIG. 39 is demonstrated. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a subroutine of setting value display processing.

(Step S104-1-1)
In step S104-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the blocker. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off a blocker provided in the medal path of the medal selector 15. Then, when the process of step S104-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-2.

(Step S104-1-2)
In step S104-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting data related to the external signal 5. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting data related to the external signal 5 when starting display of the setting value. Then, when the process of step S104-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-3.

(Step S104-1-3)
In step S104-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting value display start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the set value display start command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the set value display start command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “set value display start command” is a command having information to start display of set values. Then, when the process of step S104-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-4.

(Step S104-1-4)
In step S104-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the set value display start command in step S104-1-3. Then, when the process of step S104-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-5.

(Step S104-1-5)
In step S104-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs an LED display mode setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an LED display mode when performing setting value display processing. Then, when the process of step S104-1-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-6.

(Step S104-1-6)
In step S104-1-6, the main CPU 301 performs setting value data acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring setting value data stored in a setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S104-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-7.

(Step S104-1-7)
In step S104-1-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting setting value display data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the setting value display data based on the setting value data acquired in step S104-1-6. Then, when the process of step S104-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-8.

(Step S104-1-8)
In step S104-1-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming falling data of the input port 1. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming the fall of the setting key switch signal from the ON state to the OFF state based on the input state of the input port 1 input from the setting switch board 250. Then, when the process of step S104-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-9.

(Step S104-1-9)
In step S104-1-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF based on the result of confirming the falling data of the input port 1 in step S104-1-8. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF (step S104-1-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104-1-10, and it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not OFF. If it is determined (step S104-1-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-1-8.

(Step S104-1-10)
In step S104-1-10, the main CPU 301 performs an LED display mode setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an LED display mode when the setting value display processing is terminated. Then, when the process of step S104-1-10 is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-1-11.

(Step S104-1-11)
In step S104-1-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing data related to the external signal 5. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing data related to the external signal 5 when the display of the setting value is finished. Then, when the process of step S104-1-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-12.

(Step S104-1-12)
In step S104-1-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a set value display end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the set value display end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the set value display end command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “set value display end command” is a command having information to end display of the set value. Then, when the process of step S104-1-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-13.

(Step S104-1-13)
In step S104-1-13, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the set value display end command in step S104-1-12. Then, when the process of step S104-1-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-1-14.

(Step S104-1-14)
In step S104-1-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the blocker. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on a blocker provided in the medal passage of the medal selector 15. When the process of step S104-1-14 ends, the set value display process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S105 of the main loop process.

(Medal management process)
Next, based on FIG. 41, the medal management process performed by the process of step S105 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 41 shows a subroutine for medal management processing.

(Step S105-1)
In step S105-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game in-operation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the re-game in-operation flag is ON (step S105-1 = Yes), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the re-game in-operation flag is not ON (step S105-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-2.

(Step S105-2)
In step S105-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a medal has been inserted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not insertion of a medal is detected by the selector sensor 15s. If it is determined that a medal has been inserted (step S105-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3, and if it is determined that no medal has been inserted (step S105-2). = No), the process proceeds to step S105-4.

(Step S105-3)
In step S105-3, the main CPU 301 performs a medal insertion check process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the input number counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the value of the input number counter provided in the main RAM 303 or the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Also, processing for adding the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. When the process of step S105-3 is completed, the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-4)
In step S105-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” as the insertion request number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” as the requested number of sheets in the register. Then, when the process of step S105-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-5.

(Step S105-5)
In step S105-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the BET switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the BET button 7 by the player is detected by the BET switch 7sw. If it is determined that the BET switch is ON (step S105-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-8, and if it is determined that the BET switch is not ON (step S105). −5 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-6.

(Step S105-6)
In step S105-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “3” as the requested number of sheets to be inserted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for updating the insertion request number “1” set in the register to “3”. Then, when the process of step S105-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-7.

(Step S105-7)
In step S105-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the MAXBET switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the MAXBET button 8 by the player is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw. If it is determined that the MAXBET switch is ON (step S105-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-8, and if it is determined that the MAXBET switch is not ON (step S105). −7 = No), and the process proceeds to step S105-11.

(Step S105-8)
In step S105-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S105-8 = Yes), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3” (step S105-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-9.

(Step S105-9)
In step S105-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more (step S105-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-10, and the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S105-9 = No), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-10)
In step S105-10, the main CPU 301 performs a stored medal insertion process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S105-10 ends, the medal management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-11)
In step S105-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the checkout switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an operation of the payment button 9 by the player is detected by the payment switch 9sw. If it is determined that the settlement switch is ON (step S105-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-12, and if it is determined that the settlement switch is not ON (step S105). −11 = No), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-12)
In step S105-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more (step S105-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-13, and the value of the stored number counter is “1” or more. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S105-12 = No), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-13)
In step S105-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a settlement start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the settlement start command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the settlement start command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “settlement start command” is a command having information or the like indicating that a settlement process for returning medals stored in the gaming machine 1 to the player is started. Then, when the process of step S105-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-14.

(Step S105-14)
In step S105-14, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the settlement start command in step S105-13. Then, when the process of step S105-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-15.

(Step S105-15)
In step S105-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “1” or more (step S105-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-16, and the value of the inserted number counter is “1” or more. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S105-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-19.

(Step S105-16)
In step S105-16, the main CPU 301 performs inserted medal settlement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls to return “1” medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 in order to return the bet medals to the player. Then, when the process of step S105-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-17.

(Step S105-17)
In step S105-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the insertion number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-18.

(Step S105-18)
In step S105-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S105-17, and as a result, the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is obtained. A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “0” (step S105-18 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-20, and the value of the inserted number counter is not “0”. Is determined (step S105-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-16, and the same process is performed until the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 becomes “0”. Run repeatedly.

(Step S105-19)
In step S105-19, the main CPU 301 performs a stored medal settlement process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls to return “1” medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 in order to return the medals stored in the gaming machine 1 to the player. I do. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and as a result of performing the processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. The same processing is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. Then, when the process of step S105-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-20.

(Step S105-20)
In step S105-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a settlement end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the settlement end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the settlement end command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “payment end command” is information indicating that the bet medals have been returned to the player, or that the medals stored in the gaming machine 1 have been returned to the player. This command has information to that effect. Then, when the process of step S105-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-21.

(Step S105-21)
In step S105-21, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the payment end command in step S105-20. When the process of step S105-21 ends, the medal management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Medal insertion check process)
Next, the medal insertion check process performed by the process of step S105-3 of FIG. 41 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 42 shows a subroutine for medal insertion check processing.

(Step S105-3-1)
In step S105-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs medal passage monitoring start processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of starting a medal passage monitoring process for determining whether or not a normal medal has been inserted by the selector 15. Then, when the process of step S105-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-3-2.

(Step S105-3-2)
In step S105-3-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether an error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an error has been detected in the medal passage monitoring process started by the medal passage monitoring start process in step S105-3-1. If it is determined that an error has been detected (step S105-3-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3-10. If it is determined that no error has been detected ( The process proceeds to step S105-3-2 = No) and step S105-3-3.

(Step S105-3-3)
In step S105-3-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the medal passage monitoring process has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the medal passage monitoring process started by the medal passage monitoring start process in step S105-3-1 has ended. If it is determined that the medal passage monitoring process has ended (step S105-3-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3-4, and it is determined that the medal passage monitoring process has not ended. If it is determined (step S105-3-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-3-1 and the same process is executed until the medal passage monitoring process ends.

(Step S105-3-4)
In step S105-3-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the medal insertion number is a MAX value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the inserted number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3” and the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “50”. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the medal inserted number is the MAX value (step S105-3-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3-8, and it is determined that the medal inserted number is not the MAX value. If it is determined (step S105-3-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-3-5.

(Step S105-3-5)
In step S105-3-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S105-3-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-3-7, where the value of the inserted number counter is “3”. If it is determined that it is not “3” (step S105-3-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-3-6.

(Step S105-3-6)
In step S105-3-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-3-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-3-8.

(Step S105-3-7)
In step S105-3-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the stored number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-3-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-3-8.

(Step S105-3-8)
In step S105-3-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal insertion command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the medal insertion command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the medal insertion command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “medal insertion command” is a command having information indicating that a normal medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Then, when the process of step S105-3-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-3-9.

(Step S105-3-9)
In step S105-3-9, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a medal insertion command in step S105-3-8. When the process of step S105-3-9 ends, the medal management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Step S105-3-10)
In step S105-3-10, the main CPU 301 performs a medal insertion error detection process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for displaying error information on the payout number display 29 or the like. In addition, a medal insertion error command having information indicating that a medal insertion error has been detected is set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S105-3-10 ends, the medal insertion check process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process.

(Storage medal insertion process)
Next, the stored medal insertion process performed by the process of step S105-10 of FIG. 41 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a subroutine of stored medal insertion processing.

(Step S105-10-1)
In step S <b> 105-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter is equal to or more than the requested number of sheets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or larger than the requested number of sheets stored in the register. If it is determined that the value of the stored number counter is equal to or greater than the requested number of inputs (step S105-10-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S105-10-3, and the value of the stored number counter is If it is determined that the number is not equal to or greater than the requested number of insertions (step S105-10-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-10-2.

(Step S105-10-2)
In step S105-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the stored number counter to the requested number of input sheets. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 to the value of the requested number of sheets stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S105-10-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-3.

(Step S105-10-3)
In step S105-10-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal insertion command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the medal insertion command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the medal insertion command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “medal insertion command” is a command having information indicating that a stored medal has been inserted by operating the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8. Then, when the process of step S105-10-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-4.

(Step S105-10-4)
In step S105-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a medal insertion command in step S105-10-3. Then, when the process of step S105-10-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-5.

(Step S105-10-5)
In step S105-10-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-10-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-6.

(Step S105-10-6)
In step S105-10-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the requested number of sheets to be inserted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the number of requested insertions stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S105-10-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-7.

(Step S105-10-7)
In step S105-10-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the stored number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105-10-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S105-10-8.

(Step S105-10-8)
In step S <b> 105-10-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the insertion request number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the requested number of sheets stored in the register by the process of step S105-10-6, and as a result, the value of the requested number of sheets stored in the register is obtained. A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the number of requested insertions is “0” (step S105-10-8 = Yes), the stored medal insertion process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S106 of the main loop process. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the requested number of sheets is not “0” (step S105-10-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S105-10-5.

(Start lever check processing)
Next, the start lever check process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a subroutine of start lever check processing.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch 10sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. When it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S107-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-2, and when it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S107). −1 = No), the start lever check processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop processing.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S107-2 ends, the start lever check process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a subroutine of internal lottery processing.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs a pre-lottery error check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of detecting an error before determining the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2.

  The main CPU 301 performs a non-recoverable error process when an error is detected by the pre-lottery error check process in step S109-1.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number initial value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an initial value of a winning number when determining a winning combination. Here, in this embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “39” as the initial value of the winning number and storing it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 20) stored in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S109-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “24” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number acquired by the winning number acquiring process in step S109-5 is “24” or more. If it is determined that the winning number is “24” or more (step S109-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-11, and it is determined that the winning number is not “24” or more. In this case (step S109-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-7.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning combination determination table in accordance with the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7. For example, when the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7 is the first RT gaming state, processing for setting the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state (see FIG. 14) is performed. . Then, when the process of step S109-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 obtains data related to the winning combination corresponding to the winning number based on the first winning combination determining table set by the process of step S109-8 and the winning number stored in the register. Perform the acquisition process. Then, when the process of step S109-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to perform the lottery based on the data relating to the winning combination acquired by the lottery data acquisition process of step S109-9. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the lottery is not performed when the lottery value corresponding to the winning number is “0”. When it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16, and when it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-11)
In step S <b> 109-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the setting is a common value for all settings. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number acquired by the lottery data acquisition process in step S109-9 is the same lottery value regardless of the set value. If it is determined that the value is a common value for all settings (step S109-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-13, and if it is determined that the value is not a common value for all settings (step S109). −11 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-12.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery value acquisition process by setting value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first winning combination currently set based on the value stored in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning number stored in the register. The lottery value of the table or the second winning combination determination table is acquired and stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-13)
In step S109-13, the main CPU 301 performs all setting common lottery value acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires a lottery value of the first winning combination determination table or the second winning combination determination table that is currently set based on the winning number stored in the register, and stores it in the register. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S109-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-14)
In step S109-14, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process by setting value in step S109-12 from the random value stored in the register, or the all setting common lottery value acquisition process in step S109-13. The lottery value acquired by the above is subtracted, and the value of the register in which the random number value is stored is updated to the value after the subtraction and stored. Then, when the process of step S109-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15.

(Step S109-15)
In step S109-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process by setting value of step S109-12 from the random number value stored in the register by the lottery confirmation process of step S109-14, or step S109-13. As a result of performing the process of subtracting the lottery value acquired by the all setting common lottery value acquisition process, a process of determining whether or not a negative value is obtained is performed. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-15 = Yes), the subroutine of the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16.

  If it is determined that the winning combination has been won (step S109-15 = Yes), the winning combination corresponding to the winning number stored in the register is determined.

(Step S109-16)
In step S109-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-17.

(Step S109-17)
In step S109-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning number is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the winning number value stored in the register by the process of step S109-16. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the winning number is “0” (step S109-17 = Yes), the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number is not “0” (step S109-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the winning number is “0” (step S109-17 = YES), “losing” is determined as the winning combination.

(Design code setting process)
Next, the symbol code setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs a stop control number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the winning number of the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process in step S109 as a stop control number in a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and sets it in a register. Process. Then, when the process of step S110-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a gaming state type command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the game state type command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the game state type command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “gaming state type command” is a command indicating the type of gaming state, and the gaming state includes a non-RT gaming state, an RT1 gaming state, an RT2 gaming state, an RT3 gaming state, an RT4 gaming state, and an RT5 gaming state. RT6 gaming state exists, and is a command having information indicating which gaming state is staying among these seven kinds of gaming states by the “gaming state type command”. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-3.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the gaming state type command in step S110-2. Then, when the process of step S110-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs a display permission symbol bit setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is a display permission that is information related to a combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed on the active line based on the stop control number acquired by the stop control number acquisition process in step S110-1. Performs processing to set symbol bits. Then, when the process of step S110-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-5.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the reel rotation start acceptance command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel rotation start acceptance command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “reel rotation start acceptance command” is a command having information indicating that the operation of the start lever 10 has been accepted. Then, when the process of step S110-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-6.

(Step S110-6)
In step S110-6, the main CPU 301 performs a control command set process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the reel rotation start acceptance command in step S110-5. Then, when the process of step S110-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7.

(Step S110-7)
In step S110-7, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect lottery process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process to determine whether or not to perform a spinning effect to rotate the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. If the lottery is won, The process which stores the information which concerns on the winning rotation effect information is performed in the rotation effect information storage area currently set. Then, when the process of step S110-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-8.

(Step S110-8)
In step S110-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a spinning effect lottery command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the rotation effect lottery command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the rotation effect lottery command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “rotation effect lottery command” is a command having lottery information and the like related to the rotation effect drawn in step S110-7. Note that the lottery information includes no turning effect, turning effect 1, turning effect 2, turning effect 3, turning effect 4, turning effect 5, long freeze, and step S110-7. On the basis of the lottery result of the spinning effect lottery process, any lottery information is sent to the sub-control board 400 as a “rotating effect lottery command” from the lottery information. Then, when the process of step S110-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9.

(Step S110-9)
In step S110-9, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the spinning effect lottery command in step S110-8. Then, when the process of step S110-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-10)
In step S110-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “condition device command” is a command having information relating to the winning combination. Then, when the process of step S110-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-11.

(Step S110-11)
In step S110-11, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a conditional device command in step S110-10. When the process of step S110-11 ends, the symbol code setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Reel rotation start preparation process)
Next, the reel rotation start preparation process performed by the process of step S111 in FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel rotation start preparation processing.

(Step S111-1)
In step S <b> 111-1, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 48. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information for executing the spinning effect based on the information stored in the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the spinning device. A process of performing the production is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the timer counter set by the process of step S111-3 described later has become “0” in the previous game. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed (step S111-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-3, and if it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed ( Step S111-2 = No), the process of step S111-2 is repeatedly executed until the minimum game time has elapsed.

(Step S111-3)
In step S111-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a minimum game time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is configured so that the time from the process of step S111-3 in the previous game to the process of step S111-2 in the current game is not less than the minimum game time in order to suppress gambling for the game. Then, a process for setting the minimum game time in the timer counter is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the minimum game time is about “4.1” seconds. Then, when the process of step S111-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel rotation start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board 400, a process of setting the reel rotation start command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the reel rotation start command is a command having information indicating that rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started. Then, when the process of step S111-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-5.

(Step S111-5)
In step S111-5, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a reel rotation start command in step S111-5. When the process of step S111-5 is completed, the reel rotation start preparation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Production setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 48, the effect setting process performed by the process of step S111-1 of FIG. 47 is demonstrated. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine of effect setting processing.

(Step S111-1-1)
In step S <b> 111-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a spinning effect execution command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the rotation effect execution command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the rotation effect execution command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “rotation effect execution command” is a command having information related to execution of the rotation effect based on the lottery result in the rotation effect lottery process in step S110-7. In addition, in the rotation effect execution information, there is no rotation effect, rotation effect 1, rotation effect 2, rotation effect 3, rotation effect 4, rotation effect 5, and long freeze. Based on the lottery result of the spinning effect lottery process in S110-7, any execution information is sent to the sub-control board 400 as a “rotating effect execution command” from the above execution information. Then, when the process of step S111-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-2.

(Step S111-1-2)
In step S111-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the spinning effect execution command in step S111-1-1. Then, when the process of step S111-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-1-3.

(Step S111-1-3)
In step S <b> 111-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a spinning effect has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the rotation effect execution command is a rotation effect 1, a rotation effect 2, a rotation effect 3, a rotation, based on the rotation effect execution command in step S <b> 111-1-1. When it corresponds to any of the production 4, the spinning production 5, and the long freeze, a process of determining that the spinning production is won is performed. If it is determined that the spinning effect is won (step S111-1-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-1-4, and it is determined that the rotating effect is not won. If it is determined (step S111-1-3 = No), the effect setting process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-2 of the reel rotation start preparation process.

(Step S111-1-4)
In step S <b> 111-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a spinning effect process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a spinning effect that is determined to be executed. Then, when the process of step S111-1-4 is completed, the effect setting process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-2 of the reel rotation start preparation process.

(Reel stop pretreatment)
Next, based on FIG. 49, the reel stop pre-process performed by the process of step S112 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a subroutine for reel stop pre-processing.

(Step S112-1)
In step S112-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting data “100B” corresponding to the right reel 20 in the register as an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Then, when the process of step S112-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-2.

(Step S112-2)
In step S112-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the reel is rotating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the left to be searched based on the pull-in expected reel search initial value set in the process of step S112-1 or the value of the search target reel updated in step S112-4 described later. A process of determining whether or not the reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating is performed. If it is determined that the reel is rotating (step S112-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S112-3. If it is determined that the reel is not rotating (step S112- 2 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-4.

(Step S112-3)
In step S112-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sets the initial value of the virtual stop position, acquires the pull-in priority according to the virtual stop position, and stores it in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. Then, when the process of step S112-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S112-4.

  The main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing data stored in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303 at a predetermined timing by the pull-in prediction process in step S112-3.

(Step S112-4)
In step S112-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the next search target reel. Specifically, when it is determined that the search target reel is stopped (step S112-2 = No), the main CPU 301 performs the search target reel pull-in prediction process in the pull-in prediction process in step S112-3. When the processing is completed, the value set in the register is shifted to the right to obtain the next search target reel. Then, when the process of step S112-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-5.

(Step S112-5)
In step S112-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the processing of all reels has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pull-in prediction process for all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 has been completed. If it is determined that all reels have been processed (step S112-5 = Yes), the reel stop pre-processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S113 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that all reels have not been processed (step S112-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-2, and all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are processed. The same process is repeatedly executed until the pull-in prediction process for the reel is completed.

(Processing during reel rotation)
Next, based on FIG. 50, the reel rotation process performed by the process of step S117 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel rotation processing.

(Step S117-1)
In step S117-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop button is being pressed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw, and right stop switch 13sw have detected an operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the stop button has been pressed (step S117-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2, and if it is determined that the stop button has not been pressed (step S117). -1 = No), the reel rotation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2)
In step S117-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the left stop button 11 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the operated left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13. Processing to turn off the operable flag corresponding to the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-3.

(Step S117-3)
In step S117-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pressing information storing process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor corresponding to the operated stop button among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. 151, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, a process of acquiring the pressing reference position and storing it in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-4.

(Step S117-4)
In step S117-4, the main CPU 301 performs a sliding frame number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a sliding frame number determination table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right Based on the operation order of the stop button 13 and the like, a process of acquiring the number of sliding frames is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” frames to “4” frames as the number of sliding frames. Then, when the process of step S117-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5.

(Step S117-5)
In step S117-5, the main CPU 301 performs a reel stop process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 stops the reel based on the pressing reference position stored by the pressing information storing process of step S117-3 and the number of sliding frames acquired by the sliding frame number acquisition process of step S117-4. To perform the process. When the process of step S117-5 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Reel stop processing)
Next, based on FIG. 51, the reel stop process performed by the process of step S117-5 of FIG. 50 is demonstrated. FIG. 51 shows a subroutine for reel stop processing.

(Step S117-5-1)
In step S117-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a sliding frame command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the sliding piece command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the sliding piece command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “sliding frame command” is a command having information relating to the number of sliding frames acquired in step S117-4 in FIG. The number of sliding frames includes 0 frame sliding, 1 frame sliding, 2 frame sliding, 3 frame sliding, 4 frame sliding, and any one of the above obtained in step S117-4 in FIG. The number of sliding frames is sent to the sub-control board 400 as a “sliding frame command”. Then, when the process of step S117-5-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5-2.

(Step S117-5-2)
In step S117-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the sliding piece command in step S117-5-1. Then, when the process of step S117-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S117-5-3.

(Step S117-5-3)
In step S117-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs a stop request setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the stop position based on the value of the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the sliding frame number storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the reel A stop request is made to the control board 150. Then, when the process of step S117-5-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5-4.

(Step S117-5-4)
In step S117-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a pressed position command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the press position command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the press position command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “pressing position command” is a command having information related to the pressing reference position acquired in step S117-3. The pressing position command is a command corresponding to 21 symbols in each reel shown in the array data table of FIG. 6, and as shown in FIG. 110, is a first command indicating the pressing position command. A command is defined by “B2H” and “00H to 14H” which are second commands respectively corresponding to 21 symbols. Then, the command corresponding to the pressing reference position acquired in step S117-3 is sent to the sub-control board 400 as a “pressing position command”. Then, when the process of step S117-5-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S117-5-5.

(Step S117-5-5)
In step S117-5-5, the main CPU 301 performs a control command set process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the pressed position command in step S117-5-4. Then, when the process of step S117-5-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5-6.

(Step S117-5-6)
In step S117-5-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a pressing cylinder command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the press roll command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the press roll command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “pressing roll command” is a command having information or the like related to the pressing roll acquired in step S117-3. The pressing cylinder command includes three commands corresponding to the left stop button 11 corresponding to the left reel 18, the middle stop button 12 corresponding to the middle reel 19, and the right stop button 13 corresponding to the right reel 20, respectively. The command corresponding to the pressing cylinder acquired in step S117-3 is sent to the sub-control board 400 as a “pressing cylinder command”. Then, when the process of step S117-5-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5-7.

(Step S117-5-7)
In step S117-5-7, the main CPU 301 performs a control command set process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a pressing cylinder command in step S117-5-6. Then, when the process of step S117-5-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5-8.

(Step S117-5-8)
In step S117-5-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a stop spinning command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stop rotation command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the stop rotation command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “stop spinning command” is a command having information related to the stopped reel. The stop spinning command includes three commands corresponding to the left stop button 11 corresponding to the left reel 18, the middle stop button 12 corresponding to the middle reel 19, and the right stop button 13 corresponding to the right reel 20, respectively. A command corresponding to the stop spinning cylinder that has been stopped is sent to the sub-control board 400 as a “stop spinning command”. Then, when the process of step S117-5-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5-9.

(Step S117-5-9)
In step S117-5-9, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a stop spinning command in step S117-5-8. When the process of step S117-5-9 ends, the reel stop process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the display determination process performed by the process of step S119 of FIG. 36 is demonstrated. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination processing.

(Step S119-1)
In step S119-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display determination command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the display determination command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the display determination command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “display determination command” is a command having information on a combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S119-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2.

(Step S119-2)
In step S119-2, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting the display determination command in step S119-1. Then, when the process of step S119-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-3.

(Step S119-3)
In step S119-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S119-3 = Yes), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S119-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-4.

(Step S119-4)
In step S119-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is achieved. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “winning” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that a winning is achieved (step S119-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-5, and when it is determined that a winning is not achieved (step S119-4). = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6.

(Step S119-5)
In step S119-5, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts based on the combination of symbols related to “winning” displayed on the active line. When the process of step S119-5 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6)
In step S119-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not replay has been established. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that replay has been established (step S119-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-7, and if it is determined that replay has not been established (step S119-6). = No), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-7)
In step S119-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-7 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Payment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 53, the payout process performed by the process of step S120 in FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 53 shows a payout processing subroutine.

(Step S120-1)
In step S120-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game in-operation flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game operation flag is ON based on the value of the re-game operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the re-game operating flag is ON (step S120-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-3, and it is determined that the re-game operating flag is not ON. In the case (step S120-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-2.

(Step S120-2)
In step S120-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a remaining payout number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the payout number calculated in the payout number calculation process in step S119-5 in a register. Then, when the process of step S120-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-3.

(Step S120-3)
In step S120-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter set in the register is “1” or more by the process of step S120-2. If it is determined that the value of the remaining payout number counter is “1” or more (step S120-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-4, and the value of the remaining payout number counter is “1”. If it is determined that it is not greater than or equal to “No” (step S120-3 = No), the payout process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121 of the main loop process.

(Step S120-4)
In step S120-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a game medal payout start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the game medal payout start command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the game medal payout start command to the sub control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “game medal payout start command” is a command having information to start paying out medals. Then, when the process of step S120-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S120-5.

(Step S120-5)
In step S120-5, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a game medal payout start command in step S120-4. Then, when the process of step S120-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-6.

(Step S120-6)
In step S120-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter is “50”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “50”. If it is determined that the value of the stored number counter is “50” (step S120-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-8, and the value of the stored number counter is not “50”. (Step S120-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-7.

(Step S120-7)
In step S120-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the stored number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S120-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-9.

(Step S120-8)
In step S120-8, the main CPU 301 performs medal payout processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls to pay out “1” medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200. Then, when the process of step S120-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-9.

(Step S120-9)
In step S120-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the acquired number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the acquired number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S120-9 is completed, the process proceeds to step S120-10.

(Step S120-10)
In step S120-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the remaining payout number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the remaining payout number counter set in the register. Then, when the process of step S120-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-11.

(Step S120-11)
In step S120-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the remaining payout number counter in the process of step S120-10. Do. If it is determined that the value of the remaining payout number counter is “0” (step S120-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-12, and the value of the remaining payout number counter is “0”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S120-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-6.

(Step S120-12)
In step S120-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a game medal payout end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the game medal payout end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the game medal payout end command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “game medal payout end command” is a command having information indicating that the payout of medals has ended. Then, when the process of step S120-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-13.

(Step S120-13)
In step S120-13, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a game medal payout end command in step S120-12. When the process of step S120-13 ends, the payout process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S121 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 54, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S121 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1)
In step S121-1, the main CPU 301 performs RT gaming state transition processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the RT game state based on the current game state and the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-2.

(Step S121-2)
In step S121-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a game end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the game end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the game end command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “game end command” is a command having information that the game has ended, information related to the game state, and the like. Then, when the process of step S121-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-3.

(Step S121-3)
In step S121-3, the main CPU 301 performs control command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a game end command in step S121-2. Then, when the process of step S121-3 is completed, the game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S122 of the main loop process.

(RT gaming state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 55, the RT game state transition process performed by the process of step S121-1 of FIG. 54 will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-1)
In step S121-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a game state transition symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines a combination of symbols related to “blank”, a combination of symbols related to “preparation replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Bonus replay”, a combination of symbols related to “ART replay”, Among the symbol combinations related to “Replay” or the symbol combinations related to “RUSH Replay”, processing is performed to determine whether any symbol combination is displayed on the active line. When the game state transition symbol is displayed (step S121-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-2, and it is determined that the game state transition symbol is not displayed. (Step S121-1-1 = No), the RT game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S121-2 of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1-2)
In step S121-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-1-3.

(Step S121-1-3)
In step S121-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a game state transition time. Specifically, as shown in the game state transition diagram (see FIG. 21), the main CPU 301 performs step S121-1- when, for example, a combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed in the non-RT game state. Based on the combination of the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing of No. 2 and the symbols displayed on the active line, processing for determining whether or not the gaming state is being shifted is performed. If it is determined that the game state is being changed (step S121-1-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-4, and if it is determined that the game state is not being changed. (Step S121-1-3 = No), the RT game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S121-2 of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1-4)
In step S121-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the gaming state provided in the main RAM 303 based on the combination of the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition process in step S121-1-2 and the symbols displayed on the active line. Processing to update the value of the storage area is performed. When the process of step S121-1-4 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Checksum related processing)
Next, based on FIG. 56, the checksum related process performed by the process of step S122 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 56 shows a subroutine of checksum related processing.

(Step S122-1)
In step S122-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of correcting the sub checksum (sub checksum correction 1). Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes a process of performing correction for adding model information to the calculated checksum value. For example, “1” is added as model information for model A, and “2” is added as model information for model B. Then, when the process of step S122-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S122-2.

(Step S122-2)
In step S122-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of correcting the sub checksum (sub checksum correction 2). Specifically, when transmitting the calculated checksum value to the sub-control board 400, the main CPU 301 corrects (clears) the seventh bit value of the checksum value in order to process the original data into transmission data. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S122-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S122-3.

(Step S122-3)
In step S122-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a checksum transmission command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the checksum transmission command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the checksum transmission command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “checksum transmission command” is, for example, a command having information related to a sum value calculated for a control command transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 in a unit game. . The checksum transmission command is set in the first game after the setting value is changed, and the checksum transmission command related to the sum value in the game is set, and in the subsequent games, unless the setting value is changed. The checksum transmission command related to the accumulated sum value including the sum value up to the previous game is set. Then, when the process of step S122-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S122-4.

(Step S122-4)
In step S122-4, the main CPU 301 performs a control command set process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a setting process for transmitting a checksum transmission command in step S122-3. When the process of step S122-4 is completed, the checksum related process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

  Here, the configuration of the accumulated sum value storage area that stores the sum value in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 111, the main RAM accumulated sum value storage area indicates an accumulated sum value storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the sub RAM accumulated sum value storage area indicates an accumulated sum value storage provided in the sub RAM 403. Indicates the area. Next, the saved content indicates the sum value stored in the cumulative sum value storage area. Next, the clear condition indicates a condition for clearing the sum value stored in the cumulative sum value storage area. In the present embodiment, the thumb value is cleared based on the change of the setting of the gaming machine. Next, the clear timing indicates the timing for clearing the sum value. The clear timing is set in a control flow performed when the setting of the gaming machine is changed.

  In the present embodiment, the sum value is stored as follows.

(First game after setting change)
In the first game after the setting change, the value of the accumulated sum value storage area of the main RAM 303 and the value of the accumulated sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403 are both “0”. For example, in the game start management process, when the set value designation command indicating setting 1 is set, the main CPU 301 stores “1” as the sum value in the accumulated sum value storage area of the main RAM 303. When the sub CPU 401 receives the setting value designation command indicating the setting 1, the sub CPU 401 calculates the sum value based on the received command, and sets “1” as the sum value in the accumulated sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. Store. For example, in the game state transition process, when the main CPU 301 sets a game end command indicating RT1, “143” is stored as the sum value in the accumulated sum value storage area of the main RAM 303, and the sub CPU 401 When the game end command indicating the RT 1 is received, the sum value is calculated based on the received command, and “143” is stored as the sum value in the accumulated sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. That is, each time the main CPU 301 sets a command, the sub CPU 401 is configured to calculate and store a sum value each time it receives a command. In addition, the sum value is stored by adding values for each command. For example, after storing “1” as the sum value of the setting value designation command, the sum value of the game start command is “ When “13” is calculated, the value stored in the accumulated sum value storage area at this time is “14”. Then, the sum of the sum values at the time when the unit game ends is, for example, “1500”. That is, in the first game after the setting change, the thumb value calculated based on the command in the first game is stored.

(After the second game after setting change)
In the second and subsequent games after the setting change, the sum value of the second game is added to the sum value of the first game described above, for example, “1500”. For example, in the game start management process in the second game, the main CPU 301 adds “1” as the sum value to the accumulated sum value storage area of the main RAM 303 when a setting value designation command indicating setting 1 is set. Store with. At this time, the sum value of the accumulated sum value storage area of the main RAM 303 is “1501”. Then, the sum value calculated each time each command is set is added, and the sum value of the accumulated sum value storage area of the main RAM 303 is, for example, “1550”, “1600”, “2000”, etc. Each time it is added, it is added and stored (updated). Further, when the sub CPU 401 receives a setting value designation command indicating the setting 1, the sub CPU 401 calculates a sum value based on the received command, and displays “1” as the sum value in the accumulated sum value storage area of the sub RAM. "Is added and stored. At this time, the sum value of the accumulated sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403 is “1501”. Then, the sum value calculated each time each command is set is added, and the sum value of the accumulated sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403 is, for example, “1550”, “1600”, “2000”, etc. Each time it is added, it is added and stored (updated). For example, if the total sum value of the second game is “1400”, the sum of the sum values stored in the accumulated sum value storage area at the end of the second game is “2900”. . Therefore, unless the setting of the gaming machine is changed, the sum value is not cleared, but is added to the sum value up to the previous game and stored. In addition, the “checksum command” indicating the sum value transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 400 is also sent as a cumulative value after the second game. For example, in the above example, the sum value indicated by the checksum command transmitted at the end of the second game is transmitted as “2900”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, unless the setting is changed, for example, the sum value calculated in the second game is added to the sum value calculated in the first game and stored. At the end of the game, the value obtained by adding and storing the sum value of the first game and the sum value of the second game is the first inspection value accumulation storage means (accumulation sum value storage area) and the second inspection value accumulation storage. It is stored in the means (accumulated sum value storage area). That is, the cumulative value of the sum values in a plurality of unit games is stored. In the first game after the setting change, since the accumulated value is cleared, the sum value is added to the value of “0”. The sum value is stored in the first inspection value accumulation storage means (accumulation sum value storage area) and the second inspection value accumulation storage means (accumulation sum value storage area).

(Control command set processing)
Next, based on FIG. 57, step S8 in FIG. 35, step S11 in FIG. 35, step S13 in FIG. 35, step S102-2 in FIG. 37, step S102-10 in FIG. 37, step S102-16 in FIG. 37, step S102-18 in FIG. 38, step S103-6 in FIG. 38, step S104-1-4 in FIG. 40, step S104-1-13 in FIG. 40, step S105-14 in FIG. 41, step S105 in FIG. 42, step S105-3-9 in FIG. 42, step S105-10-3 in FIG. 43, step S110-3 in FIG. 46, step S110-6 in FIG. 46, step S110-9 in FIG. Step S110-11, Step S111-5 in FIG. 47, Step S111-1-2 in FIG. 48, Step S117- in FIG. -2, step S117-5-5 in FIG. 51, step S117-5-7 in FIG. 51, step S117-5-9 in FIG. 51, step S119-2 in FIG. 52, step S120-5 in FIG. The control command set process performed by the process of step S120-13 of 53, step S121-3 of FIG. 54, and step S122-4 of FIG. 56 will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a subroutine of control command set processing. For convenience, in each process of FIG. 57, a step number is assigned as a subroutine process in step S8 of FIG. 35. However, the same process is performed for the subroutines in the processes after step S11 of FIG. Processing will be performed.

(Step S8-1)
In step S8-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a first command among commands stored in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. For example, as shown in FIG. 109, in the case of a setting value designation command, “A4H” is set as the first command. Then, when the process of step S8-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S8-2.

(Step S8-2)
In step S8-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a second command among commands stored in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. For example, as shown in FIG. 109, if the command is a setting value designation command indicating setting 1, “01H” is set as the second command. Then, when the process of step S8-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S8-3.

(Step S8-3)
In step S8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the transmission command is a command for calculating a sum value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the command is a target command for calculating a sum value based on the commands set in steps S8-1 and S8-2. . Here, the command for calculating the sum value corresponds to the command categorized in the category A described in FIGS. 109 and 110, and the “checksum transmission command” categorized in the category B shown in FIG. "Does not correspond to the command for calculating the sum value. If it is determined that the transmission command is a command for which a sum value is to be calculated (classification A) (step S8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S8-4, where the transmission command is the sum value. If it is determined that the command is not the target command to be calculated (classification B) (step S8-3 = No), the control command setting process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S9 of the program start process.

(Step S8-4)
In step S8-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating a checksum. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating a checksum value based on the first command set in step S8-1 and the second command set in step S8-2. For example, in FIG. 109, if the command corresponds to “non-RT” as the “game start command”, the value of the thumb value is “1” based on the first command “A5H” and the second command “00H”. 12 "is calculated. Then, when the process of step S8-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S8-5.

(Step S8-5)
In step S8-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding a checksum. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates a sum value for the set command in the check sum value storage area of the main RAM 303 and sequentially stores it. In the present embodiment, the stored sum value is configured to be cleared when the setting of the gaming machine is changed. Therefore, in the first game after the setting is changed, the thumb value calculated in the first game is stored, and in the second game, the thumb value calculated in the first game is changed to the second game. The calculated sum value is added. Then, when the process of step S8-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S8-6.

(Step S8-6)
In step S8-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for updating the checksum. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the checksum value in the checksum value storage area of the main RAM 303 based on the sum value calculated in step S8-4 and added in step S8-5. Process to update to. When the process of step S8-6 ends, the control command set process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S9 of the program start process.

  In the present embodiment, each time a command is set, the control command setting process in FIG. 57 is entered and the sum value is calculated. However, the following changes may be made. For example, the sum value may not be calculated at the timing when each command is set, but may be calculated collectively (for example, at the timing when the game end command is set). In addition, when each command is set, when calculating the sum value, the sum value calculated for the main chip ID may be added to the sum value calculated for each command. In this case, the sum value calculated for the main chip ID is included in the sum value of each command. Also, a sum value calculated for the main chip ID may be added to only some commands.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, the interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving predetermined signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the setting switch board 250. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output data set process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentrated terminal board 47 when there is an output request for an external signal related to an error. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a timer measurement process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer for effect at the time of spinning effect and the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time and the like. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the reel number in order to set the target of the reel to be driven and controlled in the reel drive control process of step S206 described later. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 via the reel control board 150, the reel number set by the process of step S205 or the left reel 18 corresponding to the reel number set by the process of step S207 described later, By driving the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 of the reel 19, the right reel 20, rotation acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, etc. of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are controlled. Do. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs drive control of the right reel 20 when the reel number is “3”, and performs drive control of the middle reel 19 when the reel number is “2”. When the reel number is “1”, drive control of the left reel 18 is performed.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number currently set in the register. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel drive control process of step S206 has been performed for all the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. When it is determined that the reel number is “0” (step S208 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that the reel number is not “0” (step S208). = No), the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output process. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentration terminal board 47 and the like. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

(Step S210)
In step S210, the main CPU 301 performs LED output data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number display 28, a payout number display 29, a throwable display lamp 30, and a replay display. Processing for creating display data of the lamp 31 is performed. Then, when the process of step S210 ends, the process proceeds to step S211.

  The main CPU 301 controls to turn on a re-game display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303 when creating display data for lighting the re-game display lamp 31 in the LED output data creation processing in step S210. When the display data for turning off the re-game display lamp 31 is created, the re-game display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303 is turned off.

(Step S211)
In step S211, the main CPU 301 performs an LED display process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number display 28, a payout number display 29, a throwable display lamp 30, and a replay display. The lamp 31 is controlled. Then, when the process of step S211 is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.

(Step S212)
In step S212, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting various commands set in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S212 ends, the process proceeds to step S213.

(Step S213)
In step S213, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting a predetermined signal to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S213 ends, the process proceeds to step S214.

(Step S214)
In step S214, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S214 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs power-on processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when the power button 201 is operated and power is supplied to the gaming machine. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for analyzing a command transmitted from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker via the amplifier board 500 based on the content of the effect determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The process of outputting audio from 43 is performed. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs the Bonus display unit 32, the ART display unit 33, the RUSH display unit 34, and the stop via the panel LED relay board 700 based on the content of the effect determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The button operation display unit 35, start lever LED 36, MAXBET button LED 721, stop button LED 722, effect button LED 723, and waist panel LED 724 are controlled. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs the effect device 50, the left effect device motor 651, and the right effect device via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, based on the effect contents determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The motor 654, the left liquid crystal lift motor 657, and the right liquid crystal lift motor 660 are controlled. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 600 based on the effect contents determined by the sub effect determining process described later. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of executing a predetermined process when the effect button detection sensor 710sw detects an operation of the effect button 21 or when the cross key board 711 detects an operation of the cross key 22. . Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Power-on processing)
Next, based on FIG. 60, the process at the time of power-on performed by the process of step S301 of FIG. 59 is demonstrated. FIG. 60 shows a subroutine for power-on processing.

(Step S301-1)
In step S301-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing such as error checking of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S301-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-2.

(Step S301-2)
In step S301-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating the check sum of the sub ROM 402. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a sum value for program data, various tables, and the like stored in the sub ROM 402. Then, when the process of step S301-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-3.

(Step S301-3)
In step S301-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a sub-side checksum command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the sub checksum command in the sub transmission data storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in order to transmit the sub checksum command to the effect control board 600. Perform the process. Here, the “sub-side checksum command” is a command having information related to the sum value calculated for the program data and the like stored in the sub ROM 402 when the power is turned on. Then, when the process of step S301-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-4.

(Step S301-4)
In step S301-4, the sub CPU 401 performs sub-side checksum command set processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 401 determines the transmission order of the sub-side checksum commands to be transmitted in a plurality of times, sets the end command for confirmation after transmitting the sub-side checksum commands, etc. I do. When the process in step S301-4 is completed, the power-on process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302 in the main process on the sub control board.

  Here, an example of the sum value calculated in step S301-2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 shows the relationship between the stored data (partial) of the sub ROM 402 and the sum value. For example, the calculated sum value is determined in each of the various tables stored in the sub ROM 402, and when the power is turned on, the sum value related to the stored data in the sub ROM 402 is calculated, and the calculated sum value is calculated. The value is transmitted to the effect control board 600. The various tables shown in FIG. 115, for example, acquire a large number of games in the ART state advantageous to the player by rewriting the addition lottery value on the ART state game number addition lottery table to an invalid value. It is assumed that it becomes a target of fraud. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the sum value including the lottery table stored in the sub-ROM 402 is calculated and transmitted to the effect control board 600. Can lead to discovery.

(Sub-side checksum command set processing)
Next, the sub-side checksum command set process performed by the process of step S301-4 of FIG. 60 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a sub-checksum command set processing subroutine.

(Step S301-4-1)
In step S301-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub-side checksum command transmission order lottery process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 401 transmits the sub checksum command to the effect control board 600, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining the transmission order when the sub checksum command is transmitted in a plurality of times. Then, when the process of step S301-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-4-2.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-side checksum command is transmitted in 32 times. For example, a sub-side checksum command transmission order table as shown in FIG. Configure to keep. 116, the sub-side checksum command transmission order table includes a transmission order pattern 1, a transmission order pattern 2, a transmission order pattern 3, and a plurality of transmission order patterns, as shown in FIG. It has been. For example, in the transmission order pattern 1, the sub-side checksum command is determined to be sent in ascending order starting from the command 1, and in the transmission order pattern 2, the sub-side checksum command is sent in order from the command 32. The transmission order pattern 3 is determined as a pattern for transmitting the sub-side checksum command at random. Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), a random number value is acquired, and one of the transmission order patterns is determined based on the acquired random number value. The transmission order pattern is not limited to the above three patterns, and may be further increased. The transmission order pattern may not be determined by lottery.

(Step S301-4-2)
In step S301-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a transmission order information command determined by lottery. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the transmission order information command in the sub-side transmission data storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in order to transmit the transmission order information command to the effect control board 600. I do. Here, the “transmission order information command” is a command including the transmission order pattern information shown in FIG. 116 (b). Then, when the process of step S301-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-4-3.

(Step S301-4-3)
In step S301-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “32” in the transmission counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “32” corresponding to the number of command transmissions to a transmission counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S301-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-4-4.

(Step S301-4-4)
In step S301-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a sub-side checksum command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a sub-side checksum command according to the transmission order determined in step S301-4-1 and the value of the transmission counter set in step S301-4-3. . Then, when the process of step S301-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-4-5.

(Step S301-4-5)
In step S301-4-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the transmission counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the transmission counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S301-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-4-6.

(Step S301-4-6)
In step S301-4-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the transmission counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the transmission counter has become “0” as a result of subtracting the value of the transmission counter in step S301-4-5. If it is determined that the value of the transmission counter is “0” (step S301-4-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S301-4-7, and the value of the transmission counter is “0”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S301-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S301-4-4.

(Step S301-4-7)
In step S301-4-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the end command 1. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the end command 1 in the sub-side transmission data storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in order to transmit the end command 1 to the effect control board 600. . Here, “end command 1” is a command transmitted from the sub CPU 401 to the effect control board 600 after transmitting all the sub-side checksum commands. The effect control board 600 sets a timer after receiving all the sub-side checksum commands, and monitors whether or not the “end command 1” is received within the set time. Then, when the process of step S301-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-4-8.

(Step S301-4-8)
In step S301-4-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the end command 2. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the end command 2 in the sub-side transmission data storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 in order to transmit the end command 2 to the effect control board 600. . Here, the “end command 2” is a command transmitted from the sub CPU 401 to the effect control board 600 separately from the “end command 1” after transmitting all the sub-side checksum commands. The effect control board 600 sets a timer after receiving all the sub-side checksum commands, and monitors whether or not the “end command 2” is received within the set time. It should be noted that when neither the “end command 1” nor the “end command 2” can be confirmed, error information is output from the effect control board 600. In addition, when the reception of either “end command 1” or “end command 2” cannot be confirmed within the set time, the effect control board 600 is configured to output error information. Therefore, if a fraudulent person attempts a fraud that does not cause the sub-side checksum command to be transmitted, reception of either “end command 1” or “end command 2” cannot be confirmed. Therefore, by mounting such “end command 1” and “end command 2”, it becomes a deterrent against fraud that prevents the sub-side checksum command from being transmitted. Note that the timer setting timing may be set, for example, when the power is turned on. In this case, if “end command 1” and “end command 2” are not received within a predetermined time from power-on, an error can be generated, and the sub-side checksum command is not transmitted as described above. It is a deterrent against such fraud Then, when the process of step S301-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S301-4-8.

(Interrupt processing on sub control board)
Next, the interrupt process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main process in the sub control board at predetermined intervals.

(Step S401)
In step S401, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for transmitting a control command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for transmitting a sub-side checksum command, an end command 1 and an end command 2 to the effect control board 600. Then, when the process of step S401 ends, the process proceeds to step S402.

(Step S402)
In step S402, the sub CPU 401 performs processing related to other interrupts. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process related to another interrupt determined by the interrupt process in the sub control board. Then, when the process of step S402 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main process in the sub control board.

(Main board communication processing)
Next, based on FIG. 63, the main board | substrate communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 59 is demonstrated. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether a different command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command transmitted last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). −1 = No), the main board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for creating game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 63 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a command-by-command process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the lamp data corresponding to the production content determined by the process according to command of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the sound data corresponding to the production content determined by the process according to command of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining image data corresponding to the effect content determined by the command-specific processing in step S302-3-1. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Processing by command)
Next, based on FIG. 65, the command-by-command processing performed by the processing in step S302-3-1 in FIG. 64 will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing by command.

(Step S302-3-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether a setting value related command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a setting value related command. If it is determined that the received command is a setting value related command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2, and the received command is If it is determined that the command is not a setting value related command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-3-1-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for receiving setting value related commands, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the setting value related command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-18.

(Step S302-3-3-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a settlement command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a settlement command. If it is determined that the received command is a settlement command (step S302-3-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-4, and the received command is a settlement command. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-5-1-5.

(Step S302-3-1-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a settlement command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the payment command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18.

(Step S302-3-5-1-5)
In step S302-3-5-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a gaming state command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a gaming state command. If it is determined that the received command is a gaming state command (step S302-3-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1, and the received command is a game. If it is determined that the command is not a status command (step S302-3-1-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a game state command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the gaming state command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18.

(Step S302-3-1-7)
In step S302-3-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a spinning cylinder related command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a spinning cylinder related command. If it is determined that the received command is a spinning drum related command (step S302-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8, and the received command is If it is determined that the command is not related to the spinning cylinder (step S302-3-1-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-9.

(Step S302-3-1-8)
In step S302-3-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process related to receiving a spinning cylinder command, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the spinning cylinder related command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-8-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18.

(Step S302-3-9-1-9)
In step S302-3-9-1-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not an input / withdrawal related command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is an input / withdrawal related command. If it is determined that the received command is an input / withdrawal related command (step S302-3-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10, and the received command Is determined not to be an input / withdrawal command (step S302-3-9-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-11.

(Step S302-3-1-1-10)
In step S302-3-1-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs input / dispensing related command reception processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 performs a process according to the input / withdrawal related command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-18.

(Step S302-3-1-1-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-11-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a chip ID related command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a chip ID related command. If it is determined that the received command is a chip ID related command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-12, and the received command is If it is determined that the command is not a chip ID related command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-13.

(Step S302-3-1-1-12)
In step S302-3-1-1-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon reception of a chip ID related command, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the chip ID related command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18.

(Step S302-3-1-1-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-13-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an effect related command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is an effect related command. If it is determined that the received command is an effect-related command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-14, and the received command is an effect. If it is determined that the command is not a related command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-15.

(Step S302-3-1-1-14)
In step S302-3-1-1-14, the sub CPU 401 performs an effect related command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 401 performs a process according to the effect related command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-18.

(Step S302-3-1-1-15)
In step S302-3-1-1-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a checksum command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a checksum command. If it is determined that the received command is a checksum command (step S302-3-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-16, and the received command is checked. If it is determined that the command is not a thumb command (step S302-3-1-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-17.

(Step S302-3-1-16)
In step S302-3-1-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a checksum command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the checksum command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18.

(Step S302-3-1-1-17)
In step S302-3-1-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the received command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-18.

(Step S302-3-1-18)
In step S302-3-1-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 receives the setting value related command reception process in step S302-3-1-2, the settlement command reception process in step S302-3-1-1, and the step S302-3-1-1. 6 game state command reception processing, step S302-3-1-8 rotation related command reception processing, step S302-3-1-10 input / payout related command reception processing, step S302- 3-1-12 chip ID related command reception process, step S302-3-14-14 effect related command reception process, step S302-3-16-16 checksum command reception process, received An effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 46 or the like is determined based on the result of executing the process according to the command and the effect determination table (see FIG. 24). Processing is carried out. When the process of step S302-3-1-18 ends, the command-specific process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Processing when setting value related commands are received)
Next, based on FIG. 66, the process at the time of receiving a setting value related command performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2 of FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of receiving a setting value related command.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a setting value designation command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a setting value designation command among the setting value related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a setting value designation command (step S302-3-2-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. If it is determined that the received command is not a set value designation command (step S302-3-2-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon reception of a setting value designation command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a set value designation command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the setting value designation command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when the set value designation command received from the main control board 300 is “A4H01H”, “1” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-3 is completed, the subroutine of the process related to reception of the set value-related command is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether a set value display start command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a set value display start command among the set value related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a set value display start command (step S302-3-1-2-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-5. If it is determined that the received command is not a set value display start command (step S302-3-1-2-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a set value display start command is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a set value display start command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the set value display start command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when a set value display start command is received from the main control board 300, “23” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-6 is completed, the subroutine of the process related to reception of the set value related command is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a set value display end command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a set value display end command among the set value related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a set value display end command (step S302-3-1-2-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-8. If it is determined that the received command is not a set value display end command (step S302-3-1-2-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon reception of a set value display end command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a set value display end command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the set value display end command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when a set value display end command is received from the main control board 300, “24” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-9 is completed, the subroutine of the process related to reception of set value-related commands is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a setting change start command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a setting change start command among the setting value related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a setting change start command (step S302-3-1-2-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-11. If it is determined that the received command is not a setting change start command (step S302-3-1-2-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a setting change start command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a setting change start command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-11 is completed, the subroutine of the process related to reception of the set value related command is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon reception of a setting change end command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a setting change end command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-12 is completed, the subroutine of the process related to reception of the set value related command is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-13)
In step S302-3-1-2-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for clearing the sum value stored in the check sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of clearing the sum value stored cumulatively in the sub RAM 403 based on the change of the setting of the gaming machine. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-14)
In step S302-3-1-2-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the main chip ID replacement flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on a flag for replacing the main chip ID information stored in the sub RAM 403 based on the change of the setting of the gaming machine. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-14 is completed, the subroutine of the process related to reception of set value-related commands is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Processing when payment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 67, the adjustment command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-4 of FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of payment command reception.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a settlement start command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a payment start command among the payment commands. If it is determined that the received command is a checkout start command (step S302-3-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-14-2, and reception is performed. If it is determined that the received command is not a checkout start command (step S302-3-1-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-4.

(Step S302-3-1-4-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a settlement start command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a settlement start command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-3)
In step S302-3-1-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the checkout start command and stores the checksum value in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when a settlement start command is received from the main control board 300, “25” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-4 is completed, the subroutine for the settlement command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-4)
In step S302-3-1-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a payment completion command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a settlement end command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-4-5.

(Step S302-3-1-4-5)
In step S302-3-1-4-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the settlement end command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when a settlement end command is received from the main control board 300, “26” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). When the process of step S302-3-1-4-5 ends, the settlement command reception process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Processing when receiving gaming state command)
Next, based on FIG. 68, the game state command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-6 in FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of game state command reception.

(Step S302-3-1-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a game start command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a game start command among the game state commands. If it is determined that the received command is a game start command (step S302-3-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-2 and received. If it is determined that the received command is not a game start command (step S302-3-1-6-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-4.

(Step S302-3-1-1-6-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game start command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a game start command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the game start command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “A5H01H” is received as the game start command from the main control board 300, “13” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 is completed, the gaming state command reception process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-6-4)
In step S302-3-1-6-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a gaming state type command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a gaming state type command among the gaming state commands. If it is determined that the received command is a gaming state type command (step S302-3-6-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5. If it is determined that the received command is not a gaming state type command (step S302-3-6-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon reception of a gaming state type command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a gaming state type command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the game state type command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “ABH01H” is received as the game state type command from the main control board 300, “28” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 ends, the subroutine of the game state command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a game end command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a game end command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-8.

(Step S302-3-1-6-8)
In step S302-3-1-6-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the game end command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “B7H01H” is received as the game end command from the main control board 300, “143” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 is completed, the subroutine of the game state command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Processing when receiving swivel related commands)
Next, based on FIG. 69, the process at the time of receiving a spinning cylinder related command performed by the process of step S302-3-7-1 in FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of receiving a spinning cylinder related command.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a reel rotation start acceptance command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a reel rotation start acceptance command among the spinning cylinder related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a reel rotation start acceptance command (step S302-3-7-1- = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-2. If it is determined that the received command is not a reel rotation start acceptance command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-4.

(Step S302-3-1-7-2)
In step S302-3-1-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a reel rotation start acceptance command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a reel rotation start acceptance command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-3.

(Step S302-3-1-7-3)
In step S302-3-1-7-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the reel rotation start acceptance command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “ACH03H” is received as the reel rotation start acceptance command from the main control board 300, “36” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-7-3 is completed, the subroutine related to the process related to receiving the spinning cylinder is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-7-4)
In step S302-3-1-7-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a conditional device command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a conditional device command among the spinning cylinder related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a conditional device command (step S302-3-7-1-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5 and received. If it is determined that the received command is not a conditional device command (step S302-3-1-7-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-7.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a conditional device command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the condition device command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-6.

(Step S302-3-1-7-6)
In step S302-3-1-7-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the conditional device command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “AEH19H” is received as the conditional device command from the main control board 300, “62” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). When the process of step S302-3-1-7-6 is completed, the subroutine related to the process related to the spinning cylinder related command is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7)
In step S302-3-7-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a reel rotation start command among the spinning cylinder related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a reel rotation start command (step S302-3-7-1-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-8. If it is determined that the received command is not a reel rotation start command (step S302-3-1-7-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-10.

(Step S302-3-7-1-8)
In step S302-3-1-7-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a reel rotation start command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a reel rotation start command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-7-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-9.

(Step S302-3-1-7-9)
In step S302-3-1-7-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the reel rotation start command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when a reel rotation start command is received from the main control board 300, “84” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 110). Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7 is completed, the subroutine relating to the process related to the rotation of the spinning cylinder is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the process for each command.

(Step S302-3-1-7-10)
In step S302-3-1-7-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a sliding piece command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a sliding piece command among the spinning cylinder related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a sliding frame command (step S302-3-7-1-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-11 and received. If it is determined that the received command is not a sliding frame command (step S302-3-1-7-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-13.

(Step S302-3-7-1-11)
In step S302-3-7-1-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a sliding frame command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a sliding frame command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-12.

(Step S302-3-1-7-12)
In step S302-3-1-7-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the sliding frame command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “B1H04H” is received as the sliding frame command from the main control board 300, “96” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 110). Then, when the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7 is completed, the subroutine related to the spinning cylinder related frame command reception processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific processing. .

(Step S302-3-7-1-13)
In step S302-3-7-1-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a pressed position command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a pressed position command among the spinning cylinder related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a pressed position command (step S302-3-7-1-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7 and received. When it is determined that the received command is not a pressed position command (step S302-3-7-1-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-16.

(Step S302-3-1-7-14)
In step S302-3-7-1-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for receiving a pressed position command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a pressed position command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-15.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-15)
In step S302-3-1-7-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the pressed position command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “B2H00H” is received as the pressing position command from the main control board 300, “97” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 110). Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-15 is completed, the subroutine for the spinning cylinder related frame command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process. .

(Step S302-3-1-7-16)
In step S302-3-1-7-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a pressing cylinder command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a pressing and rotating command among the rotating and related commands. And when it is determined that the received command is a pressing cylinder command (step S302-3-7-1-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7, If it is determined that the received command is not a pressing cylinder command (step S302-3-7-1-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-19.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing at the time of receiving the pressing cylinder command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when receiving a pressing cylinder command from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-18.

(Step S302-3-7-1-18)
In step S302-3-1-7-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the pressing cylinder command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “B3H01H” is received as the pressing cylinder command from the main control board 300, “118” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 110). Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-18 is completed, the subroutine for the spinning cylinder related frame command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process. .

(Step S302-3-7-1-19)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a process at the time of stop spinning command reception. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a stop spinning command is received from the main control board 300. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-20.

(Step S302-3-7-1-20)
In step S302-3-1-7-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the stop spinning command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “B4H01H” is received as the stop spinning command from the main control board 300, “121” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 110). Then, when the processing of step S302-3-7-1-20 is completed, the subroutine relating to the spinning cylinder related frame command reception processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific processing. .

(Processing when receiving input / withdrawal related commands)
Next, based on FIG. 70, the process at the time of receiving an input / payout related command performed by the process of step S302-3-1-10 of FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of receiving an input / withdrawal related command.

(Step S302-3-1-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a display determination command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a display determination command among the input / withdrawal related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a display determination command (step S302-3-10-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-2 and received. If it is determined that the received command is not a display determination command (step S302-3-1-10-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-4.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a display determination command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the display determination command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3.

(Step S302-3-1-10-3)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the display determination command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “B5H0BH” is received as the display determination command from the main control board 300, “135” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 110). When the process of step S302-3-1-10-3 is completed, the subroutine for the input / dispensing related command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process. .

(Step S302-3-1-10-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an automatic medal insertion command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is an automatic medal insertion command among the insertion / payout related commands. If it is determined that the received command is an automatic medal insertion command (step S302-3-10-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-5. If it is determined that the received command is not an automatic medal insertion command (step S302-3-1-10-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-7.

(Step S302-3-1-10-5)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon reception of an automatic medal insertion command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when an automatic medal insertion command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-6.

(Step S302-3-1-10-6)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates the checksum value for the medal automatic insertion command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when an automatic medal insertion command is received from the main control board 300, “19” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 109). When the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-6 is completed, the subroutine for the input / dispensing related command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process. .

(Step S302-3-1-10-7)
In step S302-3-1-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a medal insertion command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a medal insertion command among the insertion / withdrawal related commands. When it is determined that the received command is a medal insertion command (step S302-3-10-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-8, and reception is performed. If it is determined that the received command is not a medal insertion command (step S302-3-1-10-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-10.

(Step S302-3-1-10-8)
In step S302-3-1-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a medal insertion command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a medal insertion command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-9.

(Step S302-3-1-10-9)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the medal insertion command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “AAH03H” is received as the medal insertion command from the main control board 300, “22” is calculated as the thumb value (see FIG. 109). When the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-9 is completed, the subroutine for the input / dispensing related command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process. .

(Step S302-3-1-1-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a payout start command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a payout start command among the input / payout related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a payout start command (step S302-3-10-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-11 and received. If it is determined that the received command is not a payout start command (step S302-3-1-1-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-13.

(Step S302-3-1-10-11)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-11, the sub CPU 401 performs payout start command reception processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a payout start command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-11 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-12.

(Step S302-3-1-10-12)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the payout start command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “B6H05H” is received as the payout start command from the main control board 300, “151” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 110). When the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-12 is completed, the subroutine for the input / payout related command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process. .

(Step S302-3-1-10-13)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a payout end command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a payout end command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-14.

(Step S302-3-1-10-14)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the payout end command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when a payout end command is received from the main control board 300, “153” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 110). When the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-14 ends, the subroutine for the input / dispensing related command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process. .

(Process when receiving chip ID related command)
Next, based on FIG. 71, the process at the time of chip ID related command reception performed by the process of step S302-3-1-12 of FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of receiving a chip ID related command.

(Step S302-3-1-12-1)
In step S302-3-1-12-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the main chip code 1 to 4 command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a main chip code 1 to 4 command among the chip ID related commands. In this process, the main chip code 1 command, the main chip code 2 command, the main chip code 3 command, and the main chip code 4 command are sequentially received, and the main chip code 1 command, the main chip code 2 command, and the main chip are received. After all of the code 3 command and the main chip code 4 command are received, a main chip code 5 command (to be described later) is received in step S302-3-1-1-3. If it is determined that the received command is a main chip code 1-4 command (step S302-3-1-12-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-2. When it is determined that the received command is not the main chip code 1 to 4 command (step S302-3-1-12-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-12-3. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-12-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating the checksum of the main chip code 1 to 4 commands. Specifically, when it is determined in step S302-3-1-12-1 that the sub CPU 401 has received any of the main chip code 1 to 4 commands, the sub CPU 401 receives the received main chip code 1 to 4 commands. A process for calculating the sum value as a target is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2 is completed, the subroutine of the chip ID related command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

  Since the main chip ID is constituted by a serial number, a main chip code 1 command, a main chip code 2 command, a main chip code 3 command, a main chip code 4 command, which are commands indicating the main chip ID, A main chip code 5 command, which will be described later, is also composed of commands having unique information. For example, the game table A and the game table B have different command contents (information on ID) even if they are the same main chip code command. Therefore, the sum value calculated for the command also shows a different value.

  For example, even if the gaming machine A and the gaming machine B receive the same main chip code 1 command, the command indicated by the gaming machine A is composed of “BBH00H” or the like, and is indicated by the gaming machine B. The command is composed of “BBH01H” or the like. Then, different sum values are calculated for these commands such that “BBH00H” is “1” and “BBH01H” is “2”. 109, the second command portion of the main chip code 1 to 5 commands is described with “*” for convenience, but a command corresponding to unique information is defined as described above. .

(Step S302-3-1-12-3)
In step S302-3-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum of the main chip code 5 command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum for the main chip code 5 command. The main chip code 5 command includes a part of main chip code 1 command data, a part of main chip code 2 command data, a part of main chip code 3 command data, and a part of main chip code 4 command. Since the command is generated based on the data, the main chip code 1 command to the main chip 4 command are all received and then received.

(Step S302-3-1-12-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the main chip ID replacement flag is on. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the main chip ID replacement flag is turned on in the process of step S302-3-1-2-14 in FIG. If it is determined that the main chip ID exchange flag is on (step S302-3-12-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-5, and the main chip ID replacement flag is switched on. If it is determined that the chip ID replacement flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-1-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-12-7.

(Step S302-3-1-12-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-12-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing the main chip ID in the sub RAM 403. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 acquires main chip ID data based on the received main chip code 1 command to main chip code 5 command, and uses the acquired main chip ID data as main chip ID data in the sub RAM 403. Processing to store in the storage area is performed. Therefore, the main chip ID data stored in the main chip ID data storage area of the sub RAM 403 is replaced based on the change of the setting of the gaming machine. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-12-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-12-6.

(Step S302-3-1-1-6)
In step S302-3-1-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the main chip ID replacement flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the main chip ID replacement flag based on the fact that the main chip ID data is stored in the main chip ID data storage area of the sub RAM 403 in the process of step S302-3-1-1-5. Process to turn off. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-6 ends, the subroutine of the chip ID related command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-12-7)
In step S302-3-1-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of reading the main chip ID stored in the sub RAM 403. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of reading the main chip ID data stored in the main chip ID data storage area of the sub RAM 403 in step S302-3-1-1-5. Then, when step S302-3-1-1-12-7 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-12-8.

(Step S302-3-1-12-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-12-12-8, the sub CPU 401 performs main chip ID collation processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for comparing the main chip ID data stored in the main chip ID data storage area of the sub RAM 403 with the main chip ID data transmitted from the main control board 300 this time. . Since the main chip ID data transmitted from the main control board 300 is set for each game in the game start management process in FIG. 37, the matching process in step S302-3-12-8 is also performed for each game. It becomes. As described above, in each game, the main chip ID data transmitted from the main control board 300 and the main chip ID data stored in the main chip ID data storage area of the sub RAM 403 are collated, thereby further improving security. Can be increased. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-12-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-12-9.

(Step S302-3-1-12-9)
In step S302-3-1-1-12-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the main chip IDs match. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores the main chip ID data transmitted from the main control board 300 and the main chip ID data storage area of the sub RAM 403 in the process of step S302-3-1-1-8. Whether or not the main chip ID data transmitted from the main control board 300 matches the main chip ID data stored in the main chip ID data storage area of the sub RAM 403 as a result of collation with certain main chip ID data. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the main chip IDs match (step S302-3-12-12 = Yes), the chip ID related command reception processing subroutine is terminated, and the command-specific processing step S302 is executed. When the process proceeds to −3-1-18 and it is determined that the main chip IDs do not match (step S302-3-12-12 = No), step S302-3-1-1-12 is performed. The processing is shifted to 10.

(Step S302-3-1-1-12-10)
In step S302-3-1-1-12-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on an error notification flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates an error that the main chip ID data transmitted from the main control board 300 and the main chip ID data stored in the main chip ID data storage area of the sub RAM 403 do not match. In order to perform notification, processing for turning on an error notification flag is performed. Regarding the error notification means for performing error notification, the liquid crystal display device 46, the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, the lower right speaker 43, the rendering device 50, the top LED 861, the corner LED 862, and the side LED 863. Are assumed to be used. Of course, other error notification means may be used.

(Processing when receiving production-related commands)
Next, based on FIG. 72, the process at the time of effect related command reception performed by the process of step S302-3-1-14 in FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the process related to receiving the production related command.

(Step S302-3-1-14-1)
In step S302-3-1-14-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a spinning effect lottery command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a spinning effect lottery command among the effect related commands. If it is determined that the received command is a spinning effect lottery command (step S302-3-1-14-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-14-2. If it is determined that the received command is not a spinning effect lottery command (step S302-3-1-14-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-14-4.

(Step S302-3-1-14-2)
In step S302-3-1-14-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a spinning effect lottery command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a spinning effect lottery command is received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-14-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-14-3.

(Step S302-3-1-14-3)
In step S302-3-1-14-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 calculates a checksum value for the spinning effect lottery command and stores it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “C1H00H” is received as the spinning effect drawing lottery command from the main control board 300, “77” is calculated as the thumb value (see FIG. 109). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-14-3 is completed, the subroutine of the effect related command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-1-4)
In Step S302-3-1-14-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for receiving a spinning effect execution command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing when a spinning effect execution command is received from the main control board 300. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-14-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-14-5.

(Step S302-3-1-14-5)
In step S302-3-1-1-14-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for calculating a checksum. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of calculating a checksum value for the rotation effect execution command and storing it in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. For example, when “C3H00H” is received as the rotation effect execution command from the main control board 300, “85” is calculated as the sum value (see FIG. 110). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-4-5 is completed, the subroutine of the effect related command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-18 of the command-specific process.

(Process when checksum command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 73, the checksum command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-16 of FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a subroutine of checksum command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-1-16-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-16-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for reading the sum value stored in the check sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of reading the sum value from the check sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403 storing the check sum value calculated each time various commands are received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-16-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-16-2.

(Step S302-3-1-16-2)
In step S302-3-1-16-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a sum value collation process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 checks the sum value calculated by the main control board 300 transmitted from the main control board 300 and the sub RAM 403 read out in the process of step S302-3-6-1-1. A process of comparing the sum value stored in the sum value storage area (the sum value calculated by the sub control board 400) is performed. Note that the checksum command transmitted from the main control board 300 is set for each game in the checksum-related processing in FIG. 56, and therefore the matching processing in step S302-3-1-16-2 is also performed for each game. Become. As described above, in each game, the security can be further improved by comparing the checksum value transmitted from the main control board 300 with the checksum value stored in the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. it can. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-16-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-16-3.

(Step S302-3-1-16-3)
In step S302-3-1-16-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the sum values match. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 checks the checksum value transmitted from the main control board 300 and the checksum value storage area of the sub RAM 403 in the process of step S302-3-16-2. As a result of collating the sum value, a process is performed to determine whether or not the check sum value transmitted from the main control board 300 matches the check sum value stored in the check sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. . If it is determined that the sum values match (step S302-3-1-16-3 = Yes), the checksum command reception processing subroutine is terminated, and the command-specific processing step S302-3 is performed. The process proceeds to -1-18, and if it is determined that the sum values do not match (step S302-3-1-16-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-16-4. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-1-16-4)
In step S302-3-1-16-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on an error notification flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 notifies the error that the check sum value transmitted from the main control board 300 does not match the check sum value stored in the check sum value storage area of the sub RAM 403. In order to perform the process, a process of turning on the error notification flag is performed. Regarding the error notification means for performing error notification, the liquid crystal display device 46, the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, the lower right speaker 43, the rendering device 50, the top LED 861, the corner LED 862, and the side LED 863. Are assumed to be used. Of course, other error notification means may be used.

(Processing when conditional device command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 74, the conditional device command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-7-1-5 of FIG. 69 will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing when a conditional device command is received.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-1, the sub CPU 401 performs state transition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Here, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1, a subroutine corresponding to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is provided (see FIGS. 74 to 94). ). Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is ON based on the value of the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the chance state winning flag is ON (step S302-3-7-1-5-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3. If it is determined that the chance state winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2 = No), the conditional device command reception process subroutine is terminated, and the spinning related command is completed. The processing shifts to step S302-3-1-7-6 of the reception processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” in the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3 is completed, the subroutine for the conditional device command reception process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-7-6 of the spinning cylinder related command reception process is ended. The process is transferred to.

(Normal processing)
Next, based on FIG. 75, the normal state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the normal state in the state-by-state transition process of step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-1-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-7-1-7-1-2 = Yes), step S302-3-7-1-7- When the process proceeds to 5-1-3 and it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-7-1-7-1-2 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-3)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-7-1-5-1-4 = Yes), step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-5. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1 = No), step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -1-7.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “3” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-6.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-6 ends, the normal state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5-5 of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-5-1-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-7 = Yes), step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. When the process proceeds to -1-8 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-7 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to 3-1-7-5-1-10.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-8)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-9.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-9 ends, the subroutine for the normal state process ends, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-10)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25A). Based on this, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-11.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it has been determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-10. Perform the process. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-1-7-5-1-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-7-5-1-12, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-15.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-13.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-13)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-1-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the bonus based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27A) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until the transition to the ready state is determined, and processing for setting the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-14.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the Bonus precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus precursor state. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-14 ends, the subroutine for the normal state process ends, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-15)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-1-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 shifts to the chance state based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the chance state shift lottery table (see FIG. 28) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process of lottery is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-16.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the chance state as a result of the lottery processing by the chance state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-7-5-1-15. I do. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-1-7-5-1-16 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-1-7-5-1-17, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-5-1-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-20.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-1-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the chance precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the chance sign state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the chance sign state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-18.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-18)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-1-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the chance state winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the chance state winning flag in the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-19.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-19)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-1-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the chance based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the chance predictor game number determination table (see FIG. 27B) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until the transition to the state is determined, and the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-20.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-20)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-1-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is OFF based on the value of the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the chance state winning flag is OFF (step S302-3-7-1-5-1-20 = Yes), step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-21. If it is determined that the chance state winning flag is not OFF (step S302-3-7-1-5-1-20 = No), the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-2 of the process at the time of receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-21)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-1-21, the sub CPU 401 performs a fake game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the normal state fake game number determination table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 29A). Then, processing for determining the number of fake games and setting the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-1-21 ends, the normal state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Treatment for chance precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 76, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. 74, a chance to be performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is a chance precursor state. The precursor state process will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a subroutine of chance sign state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-2-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-2-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-7-1-5-2-2 = Yes), step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-3 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-7-1-5-2-2 = No), step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -2-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-2-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-4 is completed, the chance sign state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing is ended. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-5-2-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-6.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the processing of step S302-3-7-1-5-2-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-2-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. When the processing is shifted to -2-7 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-2-6 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to −3-1-7-5-2-9.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-7)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-2-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 26B) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process for determining any of the three Bonus standbys is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-8.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-8 is completed, the subroutine of the chance precursor state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-2-9)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-2-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25B). Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-10.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-2-10)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-2-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-1-7-5-2-9. Perform the process. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-7-1-7-2-10 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-11, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-7-2-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-14.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-11)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 26B) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process for determining any of the three Bonus standbys is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-2-12.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-2-12)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the bonus based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27A) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until the transition to the ready state is determined, and processing for setting the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-13.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the Bonus precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus precursor state. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-13 is completed, the chance sign state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing is ended. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the chance sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-1-7-5-2-5. Then, a process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the chance sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0”. Then, when it is determined that the value of the chance sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-2-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1- When the process proceeds to 7-5-2-15, and it is determined that the value of the chance sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-14). = No), the chance sign state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-2-15)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the chance state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-16.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-2-16)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the chance state winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the chance state winning flag in the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-17.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-2-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “10” to the value of the chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2-17 is completed, the chance sign state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing is ended. The process is shifted to -2.

(Process for Bonus precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 77, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. 74, the Bonus is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state. The precursor state process will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus precursor state process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-7-1-5-3-2 = Yes), step S302-3-7-1-7- When the process proceeds to 5-3-3 and it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-7-1-5-3-2 = No), The processing moves to step S302-3-1-7-5-3-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” in the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-1-7-5-3-4 = Yes), step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-5 is performed. When it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-7-1-5-3-4 = No), step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. Shifts the process to -3--7.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-6.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-6 ends, the Bonus precursor state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-3-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-7 = Yes), step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. When the process is shifted to -3--8 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-7 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to −3-1-7-5-3-9.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-8 ends, the Bonus precursor state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with it being 1st Bonus waiting or 2nd Bonus waiting (step S302-3-7-1-5-3-9 = Yes), step S302-3-1-7-5 When the process is shifted to -3-10 and it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting or the second Bonus is not waiting (Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-9 = No), Step S302 is performed. The process shifts to 3-1-7-5-3-11.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-10)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-3-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (see FIG. 30A). ) Or the promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) (see FIG. 30B), the selected promotion lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command On the basis of the first Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the second Bonus standby or the third Bonus standby is performed, and in the second Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the third Bonus is standby is performed. The lottery result is stored in a Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-11.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-3-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-12.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-3-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1— When the process proceeds to 7-5-3-13 and it is determined that the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-12). = No), the subroutine of the Bonus precursor state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-5-2 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-3-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-3-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-3-13 ends, the Bonus precursor state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Chance state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 78, a chance state that is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the chance state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a subroutine of chance state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-7-1-5-4-2 = Yes), step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-3. When it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-7-1-5-4-2 = No), step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -4-6.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-7-5-4-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-5 is completed, the chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing is ended. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. When the process proceeds to −4-7 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-6 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to −3-1-7-5-4-9.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-7)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-4-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 26C). Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-8.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-8 ends, the chance state processing subroutine ends and step S302-3-1-7-5-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-10.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25C). Based on this, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-11.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-11)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to move to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery by the chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process of Step S302-3-1-7-5-4-10. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-1-7-5-4-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-12, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-5-5-4-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-14.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 26C). Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-7-5-4-13.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-4-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-13 ends, the chance state process subroutine ends and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the chance state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-1-7-5-4-9. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the chance state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-7-5-4-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1-7 is performed. When the process proceeds to −5-4-15 and it is determined that the value of the chance state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-4-14 = No) ), The chance state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-5-2 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-15)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-4-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-4-15 is completed, the chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing is ended. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Bonus ready state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 79, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. 74, the Bonus is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state. The preparation state process will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-5-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-5-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. When it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-7-1-5-5-1 = Yes), step S302-3-7-1-7-5-5-2. When it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-7-1-5-5-1 = No), step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. The process is shifted to -5-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-5-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-5-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-5-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-7-5-5-3.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-5-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-5-3 ends, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-5-5-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-5-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting or the second Bonus is waiting (Step S302-3-7-1-5-5-5 = Yes), Step S302-3-1-7-5 is performed. When the process proceeds to -5-5 and it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting or the second Bonus is not waiting (Step S302-3-7-1-5-5-5 = No), the Bonus preparation is performed. The state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-5-5)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-5-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (see FIG. 30A). ) Or the promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) (see FIG. 30B), the selected promotion lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command On the basis of the first Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the second Bonus standby or the third Bonus standby is performed, and in the second Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the third Bonus is standby is performed. The lottery result is stored in a Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-5-5 ends, the bonus preparation state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Process for the first Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 80, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. 74, the process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first Bonus state. The 1 Bonus state process will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-6-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the winning combination included in the conditional device command is on condition that the value of the ART winning flag stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF. Based on this information and the first Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31A) provided in the sub-ROM 402, a process of lottering whether to shift to the ART ready state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-3.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-3)
In step S302-3-1-7-5-6-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery processing by the ART preparation state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-7-5-6-2. Perform the process. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-4, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-6-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-6-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-6-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 obtains the result of subtracting “1” from the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-5-6-1. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-6-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1— When the process proceeds to 7-5-6-6 and it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-7-5-6-6). = No), the subroutine for the first Bonus state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2 of the process upon receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-6-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on a value stored in an ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S302-3-7-1-5-6-6 = Yes), the process goes to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-7. If the processing is shifted and it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-7-5-6-6 = No), step S302-3-1-7-5-6 is performed. The process is shifted to -9.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-6-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-8.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-6-8)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-6-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-8 ends, the subroutine for the first Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-6-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-6-9 ends, the subroutine for the first Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Second Bonus state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 81, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The 2Bonus state process will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the winning combination included in the conditional device command is on condition that the value of the ART winning flag stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF. Based on the above information and the second Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31B) provided in the sub ROM 402, a process of lottering whether to shift to the ART ready state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-3.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-3)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the ART preparation state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-7-5-7-2. Perform the process. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-3 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-4, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-7-5-7-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-7-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-7-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-7-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 obtains the result of subtracting “1” from the value of the second Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-1. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-7-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1— When the process shifts to 7-5-7-6 and it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-7-5-7-7-5). = No), the second bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-2 of the conditional device command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-7-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on a value stored in an ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-7-5-7-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-7-7. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-7-5-7-6 = No), step S302-3-1-7-5-7 is performed. The process is shifted to -9.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-7-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-8.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-8)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-7-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-7-5-7-8 ends, the subroutine for the second Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-7-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-7-9 ends, the subroutine for the second Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Process for 3rd Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 82, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. 74, the processing is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third Bonus state. The 3Bonus state process will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-5-8-2)
In step S302-3-1-7-5-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery process by adding the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (third Bonus state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32A). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-3.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-3)
In step S302-3-1-7-5-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery process by adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-1-7-5-8-2. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-1-7-5-8-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-4, If it is determined that the winning combination has not been made (step S302-3-1-7-5-8-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-5-8-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-8-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery processing by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-1-7-5-8-2. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-8-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the third Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-5-8-1. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the third Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-8-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1— When the process shifts to 7-5-8-6 and it is determined that the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-5). = No), the third Bonus state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-5-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-8-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-8-6 ends, the third Bonus state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Processing for the first fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 83, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first fall standby state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The first falling standby state process will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-1)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-9-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a first falling standby state pull-out lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a pull-down lottery table for the first fall standby state provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 33A). Based on this, after the Bonus state is completed, a process of lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-2)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, has the sub CPU 401 been determined to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery by the first falling standby state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-1? Processing to determine whether or not. And when it determines with having been won (step S302-3-7-1-5-9-2 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-2 = No), the first fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-7-1-7-5-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-9-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-9-3 is completed, the first fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-7 of the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(ART preparation status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 84, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. 74, the ART performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART ready state. The preparation state process will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART preparation state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-10-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-10-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state) (FIG. 32). Based on (B), a process of drawing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-10-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-10-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-10-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery processing in step S302-3-7-1-7-5-10-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-7-5-10-2 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-10-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-7-5-10-2 = No), the subroutine of the ART preparation state process is terminated, and the conditional device command reception process step S302 is completed. The process shifts to 3-1-7-5-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-10-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-10-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process in the step S302-3-1-7-5-10-1 by adding the number of games for the ART state to the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-10-3 is completed, the ART preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(ART status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 85, the ART state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART state in the state-specific transition processing of step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-1)
In Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-11-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-7-1-5-11-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. The process proceeds to -7-5-11-3, and when it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is not equal to or greater than "1" (step S302-3-1-7-5-11) -2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-11-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-11-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-11-4, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state) (FIG. 32). Based on (B), a process of drawing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-5)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery process by adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-7-1-5-11-4. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-5 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-6, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-11-7.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-11-6, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery processing by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-7-1-5-11-4 in the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-7.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-7)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-11-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a first added state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401, based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the first added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) provided in the sub ROM 402, A process of drawing whether or not to shift to the first addition state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-7 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-8.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-8)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-11-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has determined to shift to the first added state as a result of the lottery by the first added state shifting lottery process in step S302-3-1-7-5-11-7. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-9, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-11.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-9)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-11-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a first extra sign game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the first extra sign game number determination table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 27C). Then, the number of precursor games until the transition to the first extra preparation state is determined, and the value of the first extra precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-9 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-10.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-11-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first added sign state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first addition sign state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first add sign state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-15.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-11-11)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-11-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401, based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the second added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) provided in the sub ROM 402, The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the second added state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-12.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-12)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has determined to shift to the second added state as a result of the lottery process by the second added state shifting lottery process in step S302-3-1-7-5-11-11. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-7-5-11-12 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-13, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-16.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-13)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-11-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a second extra sign game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the second added sign game number determination table (see FIG. 27D) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, the number of precursor games until the transition to the second supplementary preparation state is determined, and the value of the second supplementary precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-13 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-14.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-11-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second added sign state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the second surrender sign state in the status storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second surrender sign state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-15.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-15)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-11-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the ART state fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-15 is completed, the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing is ended. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-11-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-5-11-1. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is “1” or more is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-7-1-5-11-16 = Yes), step S302-3-1— When the process proceeds to 7-5-11-17 and it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-16). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-11-19.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-11-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-11-17 = Yes), step S302-3-1— When the process shifts to 7-5-11-18 and it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-17). = No), the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-18)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-11-18, the sub CPU 401 performs the ART state fake game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state fake game number determination table (see FIG. 29B) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, the number of ART state fake games is determined, and the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is set. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-18 is completed, the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1-7-5 of the conditional device command reception processing is ended. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-19)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-11-19, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the fourth fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the fourth fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the fourth fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-11-19 ends, the ART state processing subroutine ends and step S302-3-1-7-5-5 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(First extra sign state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 86, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first added sign state in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. A description will be given of the first extra sign state process. Note that FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first extra sign state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-1)
In Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-12-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first extra sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-3.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-12-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (addition sign state) (FIG. 32C). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-12-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-12-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery processing by adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-7-1-5-12-3. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-7-1-5-12-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-5, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-1-7-5-12-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-6.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-12-5, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process in the step S302-3-1-7-5-12-3 by adding the number of games for ART state to the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-6.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-12-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first extra sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the processing of step S302-3-7-1-5-12-2. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the first extra sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-12-6 = Yes), step S302-3- If the process proceeds to 1-7-5-12-7 and it is determined that the value of the first extra sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-7-5) -12-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-12-8.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-5-12-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-12-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first addition preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first addition preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first addition preparation state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-7 is completed, the subroutine for the first surrender sign state process is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-12-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 through the process of step S302-3-7-1-5-12-1. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-12-8 = Yes), step S302-3-1-7 is performed. When the process proceeds to -5-12-9 and it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not "0" (step S302-3-7-1-5-12-12 = No) ), The first extra sign state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-2 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-9)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-12-9, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter guarantee processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 prevents the ART state from ending because the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “0” even though it is determined to shift to the first additional state. Therefore, a process of copying the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-12-9 is completed, the subroutine for the first surrender sign state process is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(First add-on preparation state process)
Next, based on FIG. 87, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first addition preparation state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The first addition preparation state process will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the first addition preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-13-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-13-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32D). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-13-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-13-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-13-2)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-13-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery processing by adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-7-1-5-13-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-7-5-13-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-13-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-7-5-13-2 = No), the first add-on preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The processing moves to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-13-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-13-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-7-1-5-13-1. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-13-3 is completed, the first add-on preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-7 of the conditional device command reception process is completed. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(Process for the first added state)
Next, based on FIG. 88, it is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first added state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The first added state process will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first added state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-14-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-2)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (first addition state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32 (E ))), A process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-3.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-14-3)
In step S302-3-1-7-5-14-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery process by adding the number of games for ART state in step S302-3-7-1-5-14-2. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-7-5-14-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-4, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-1-7-5-14-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-14-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-14-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery processing by the lottery process for adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-7-1-5-14-2 in the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-14-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first added state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first added game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-5-14-1. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the first added state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-14-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -7-5-14-6 and it is determined that the value of the first added game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-1-7-5-14). −5 = No), the first added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-5-5-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-14-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second fall standby state. Do. When the processing of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-14-6 is completed, the first added state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-7-1-7 of the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process proceeds to 5-2.

(Processing for second fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 89, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby state in the state-by-state transition process of step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The second fall standby state process will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-15-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-15-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (second fall standby state) (FIG. 32 ( Based on G), a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-15-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-15-2.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-15-2)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-15-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery process by adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-7-1-5-15-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-7-1-5-15-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-15-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-5-15-2 = No), the second fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The processing moves to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-15-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-15-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery processing by the lottery process for adding the number of games for ART state in step S302-3-7-1-5-15-1. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-15-3 is completed, the subroutine for the second fall standby state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-7 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(Second extra sign state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 90, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added sign state in the state-specific transition process of step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. Next, the second extra sign state process will be described. Note that FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second sign-on state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-1)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-16-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-16-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second extra sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-3.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-3)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery process by adding the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (addition sign state) (FIG. 32C). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-4.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-16-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery processing by adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-7-1-5-16-3. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-7-5-16-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-5, If it is determined that the winning combination has not been won (step S302-3-1-7-5-16-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-6.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-16-5, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-7-1-5-16-3. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-6.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-16-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second extra sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-16-2. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the second extra sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-16-6 = Yes), step S302-3- The process proceeds to 1-7-5-16-7, and when it is determined that the value of the second extra sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-7-5) -16-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7-5-16-8.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-16-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second addition preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the second addition preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second addition preparation state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-7 is completed, the subroutine for the second surrender sign state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-7 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-16-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-16-1. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-7-5-16-8 = Yes), step S302-3-1-7 is performed. When the process proceeds to −5-16-9 and it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-16-16 = No) ), The second added sign state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-5-2 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-16-9, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter guarantee processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 prevents the ART state from ending because the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “0” even though it is determined to shift to the second additional state. For this purpose, processing is performed to copy the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-16-9 ends, the subroutine for the second surrender sign state process ends, and step S302-3-1-7 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(Second add-on preparation state process)
Next, based on FIG. 91, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second addition preparation state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. Next, a description will be given of the second add-on preparation state process. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second addition preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-17-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-17-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32D). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-17-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-17-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-17-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-17-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery process by adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-7-1-7-17-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-7-5-17-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-17-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-7-5-17-2 = No), the second add-on preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The processing moves to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-17-3)
In step S302-3-1-7-5-17-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-7-1-5-17-1, in the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-17-3 is completed, the subroutine for the second additional preparation state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-7 of the conditional device command reception process is completed. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(Process for the second added state)
Next, based on FIG. 92, this is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S <b> 302-3-7-5-1 in FIG. 74. The second added state process will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second added state process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-1)
In Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-18-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (second addition state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32 (F ))), A process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-3.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-18-3)
In step S302-3-1-7-5-18-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery process by adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-7-1-5-18-2. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-7-1-5-18-3 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-4, If it is determined that the winning combination has not been made (step S302-3-1-1-7-5-18-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-5-18)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process in the step S302-3-1-7-5-18-2 by adding the number of games for the ART state to the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-5.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-18-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second added state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-18-1. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the second added state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-7-1-5-18-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -7-5-18-6 and it is determined that the value of the second added state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-7-5-18). -5 = No), the second added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-5-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-18-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the third fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-18-6 ends, the subroutine for the second added state process ends, and step S302-3-1-7- of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process proceeds to 5-2.

(Processing for the third fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 93, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is in the third fall standby state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The third falling standby state process will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a subroutine of third fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-19-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-19-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (third fall standby state) (FIG. 32 ( Based on H), a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-19-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-19-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-19-2)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-19-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery processing by adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-7-1-5-19-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-7-1-5-19-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-19-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-1-7-5-19-2 = No), the third fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The processing moves to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-2.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-19-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-19-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-7-1-5-19-1 to the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-5-19-3 is completed, the third fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-7 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(Fourth fall waiting state process)
Next, based on FIG. 94, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-7-1-5-1 in FIG. The fourth fall standby state process will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a subroutine of fourth fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-20-1)
In step S302-3-1-1-7-5-20-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a fourth falling standby state pull-out lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the fourth roll-down standby state pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33B) provided in the sub ROM 402. Based on this, after the ART state is completed, a process of lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART state again. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-20-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-20-2.

(Step S302-3-7-1-7-5-20-2)
In step S302-3-7-1-7-5-20-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the ART state as a result of the lottery by the fourth falling standby state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-1-7-5-20-1. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having been won (step S302-3-7-1-5-20-2 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-20-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-7-1-5-5-20-2 = No), the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-7-1-7-5-2.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-20-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-20-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-20-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-7-1-7-5-20-4.

(Step S302-3-1-7-5-20-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-7-5-20-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-7-1-7-5-20-4 ends, the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-7 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -5-2.

(Process when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 95, the display determination command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-10-2 of FIG. 70 will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of display determination command reception.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs display state command transfer state transition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Here, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-1-12-1, a subroutine corresponding to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is provided (see FIGS. 96 to 103). ). When the process of step S302-3-10-2-1 ends, the display determination command reception process subroutine ends, and the input / payout related command reception process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-. The processing is shifted to 3.

(Process for Bonus preparation status when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 96, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus ready state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-10-2-1 in FIG. The processing for the Bonus preparation state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing for preparing for a bonus when receiving a display determination command.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not the Bonus replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the Bonus replay is displayed (step S302-3-10-2-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-10-2-1-2. When it is determined that the Bonus replay is not displayed (step S302-3-10-2-1-1 = No), the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3 of the process at the time of receiving the input / withdrawal related command.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-1-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby is performed based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-10-2-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-10-2-1-2. If it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-1-10-2-1-2 = No), step S302-3-1-10-2-1-5 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-1-2-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-2-1-4.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “30” to the value of the first bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-2-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-2-1-10.

(Step S302-3-1-1-102-1-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-1-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the second Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second Bonus standby is based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the second Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-10-2-1-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-10-102-1-6. If it is determined that the second Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-1-10-2-1-5 = No), step S302-3-1-10-2-1-8 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-2-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-2-1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “40” to the value of the second bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “40” to the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-2-1-7 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-2-1-10.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-2-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-2-1-9.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-1-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-2-1-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-2-1-10.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-1-1-10-2-1-10 is completed, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state processing at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302- of the processing at the time of receiving an input / dispensing related command is completed. The process is transferred to 3-1-10-3.

(Processing for the first fall standby state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 97, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first fall-standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-10-2-1 in FIG. The process for the first fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in the state will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-2-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S302-3-10-2-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-2-2. If it is determined that the blank is not displayed (step S302-3-10-2-2-1 = No), the first fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3 of the process at the time of receiving the input / withdrawal related command.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-2-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-2-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-2-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-2-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-2-2-2 is completed, the subroutine of the first fall standby state process at the time of display determination command reception ends, and the process at the time of input / payout related command reception process ends. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-10-3.

(Process for ART ready state when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 98, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART ready state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-10-2-1 in FIG. The processing for ART ready state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART preparation state processing when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-3-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the ART replay is displayed (step S302-3-10-2-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-10-2-3-2. If it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-1-10-2-3-1 = No), the subroutine for the ART preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3 of the process at the time of receiving the input / withdrawal related command.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-3-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-2-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-3-3-3.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-3-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-1-1-2-3-3 is completed, the subroutine of the ART ready state processing at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302- of the processing at the time of receiving input / dispensing related commands is completed. The process is transferred to 3-1-10-3.

(Process for the first extra preparation state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 99, the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the display command reception state transition processing in step S302-3-10-2-1 in FIG. 95 is the first addition preparation. The process for the first addition preparation state at the time of display determination command reception performed in the state will be described. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first added state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is displayed (step S302-3-10-2-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-10-2-4-2. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed (step S302-3-1-1-2-4-2-1 = No), the first addition preparation state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command Is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3 of the process at the time of receiving the input / withdrawal related command.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-4-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first added state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first added state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first added state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-4-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-4-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-4-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the first added game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-2-4-3 is completed, the subroutine for the first addition preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and the process at the time of reception of an input / payout related command is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-10-3.

(Process for the second extra preparation state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 100, the state managed by the sub control board 400 in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-10-2-1 in FIG. The processing for second addition preparation state at the time of display determination command reception performed in the state will be described. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second added state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-5-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-5-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a special replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the special replay is displayed (step S302-3-10-2-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-5-2. If it is determined that the special replay is not displayed (step S302-3-10-2-5-1 = No), the second addition preparation state processing subroutine upon receipt of the display determination command Is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3 of the process at the time of receiving the input / withdrawal related command.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-5-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second addition state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second added state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second added state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-5-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-5-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the second added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-5-3 is completed, the subroutine of the second addition preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and the process at the time of reception of the input / payout related command is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-10-3.

(Processing for the second fall standby state when receiving the display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 101, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby in the display command reception state transition process of step S302-3-10-2-1 in FIG. The process for the second fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in the state will be described. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-6-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the ART replay has been displayed (step S302-3-10-2-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-10-2-6-2. If it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-1-10-2-6-1 = No), the subroutine for the second fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is performed. Is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3 of the process at the time of receiving the input / withdrawal related command.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-6-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-2-6-2 is completed, the subroutine of the second fall standby state process at the time of display determination command reception ends, and the process at the time of input / payout related command reception process ends. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-10-3.

(Processing for the third fall standby state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 102, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third fall standby in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-10-2-1 in FIG. The process for the third fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in the state will be described. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-7-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the ART replay has been displayed (step S302-3-10-2-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-10-2-7-2. If it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-1-10-2-7-1 = No), the third fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command is performed. Is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3 of the process at the time of receiving the input / withdrawal related command.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-7-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. When the processing of step S302-3-1-1-2-7-2 is completed, the subroutine for the second fall standby state processing at the time of display determination command reception ends, and the processing at the time of reception of the input / payout related command is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-10-3.

(Process for 4th fall waiting state when display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 103, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-10-2-1 in FIG. The process for the fourth fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in the state will be described. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the fourth fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-8-1)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-2-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S302-3-10-2-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-2-8-2. If it is determined that the blank is not displayed (step S302-3-10-2-8-1 = No), the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3 of the process at the time of receiving the input / withdrawal related command.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-8-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-2-8-3.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-8-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “999” as the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-8-3 is finished, the subroutine of the fourth fall standby state process at the time of display determination command reception is ended, and the process at the time of receiving an input / payout related command is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-10-3.

(Main processing performed by the production control board)
Next, based on FIG. 104, the main process performed by the effect control board 600 will be described.

(Step S501)
In step S501, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs sub-control board communication processing that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of analyzing the command transmitted from the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S501 ends, the process proceeds to step S502.

(Step S502)
In step S502, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 reads a main processing program performed by the effect control board 600 from the liquid crystal control ROM 602 based on the power being supplied to the gaming machine, and various modules of the liquid crystal control CPU 601 and the VDP 607. A process for instructing the initial setting is performed. Here, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 provides, as an instruction for initial setting of the VDP 607, (1) a process of instructing the creation of the video signal in order to instruct the display circuit constituting the VDP 607 to create and output the video signal (display register). (2) In order to expand the frequently used image data in the image data expansion area of the VRAM in the expansion circuit constituting the VDP 607, the predetermined initial value data is expanded in the expansion register. (3) In order to cause the drawing circuit constituting the VDP 607 to draw initial value image data (for example, a character image “power-on”), a process of outputting an initial value display list is performed. Then, when the process of step S502 ends, the process proceeds to step S503.

(Step S503)
In step S503, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs drawing execution start processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for setting drawing execution start data in the drawing register in order to instruct the VDP 607 to execute drawing on the display list that has already been output. That is, at the start of power-on, execution of drawing for the initial value display list output in step S502 is instructed, and during normal routine processing, execution of drawing for the display list output by processing in step S506 described later is instructed. It will be. Then, when the process of step S503 ends, the process proceeds to step S504.

(Step S504)
In step S504, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs an effect instruction command analysis control process. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for analyzing a command transmitted from the I / F circuit of the sub control board 400. More specifically, when the effect control board 600 receives a command transmitted via the I / F circuit of the sub-control board 400, the received command is received by a command reception interrupt process of the effect control board 600 (not shown). After storing in the reception buffer, the received command is analyzed. Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 checks whether or not the command is stored in the reception buffer in the effect designation command analysis process. If the command is not stored in the reception buffer, whether or not the command is stored in the reception buffer. The process which continues and performs the process which confirms is performed. On the other hand, if a command is stored in the reception buffer, a process for reading a new command is performed. Thereafter, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines an animation group to be executed based on the read command, determines an anime pattern from each anime group, and erases the read effect pattern designation command from the transmission buffer after the animation pattern is determined. Control. Then, when the process of step S504 ends, the process proceeds to step S505.

(Step S505)
In step S505, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs animation control processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines various animation scenes based on “scene switching counter”, “weight frame”, “frame counter” described later, and the animation pattern determined by the processing as described above. Process to update the address. Then, when the process of step S505 ends, the process proceeds to step S506.

(Step S506)
In step S506, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs display list generation / output processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority order (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. The display list is generated, and the display list that has been generated is controlled to be output to the VDP 607. The output display list is stored in the display list storage area of the VRAM via the I / F circuit in the VDP 607. Then, when the process of step S506 ends, the process proceeds to step S507.

(Step S507)
In step S507, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the FB switching flag is “01”. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 completes the previous display list drawing in the interrupt process (not shown) in the effect control board performed every “1/60 seconds (about 16.6 ms)”. Processing for determining whether or not the FB switching flag is “01” is performed. When it is determined that the FB switching flag is “01” (step S507 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S508, and when it is determined that the FB switching flag is not 01 (step S507). = No), the process of step S507 is repeatedly executed until the FB switching flag becomes "01".

(Step S508)
In step S508, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for setting the FB switching flag to “00”. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that drawing of the previous display list has been completed by the process of step S507, and therefore determines whether or not drawing of the next display list has been completed. Processing to set the switching flag to “00” is performed. Then, when the process of step S508 ends, the main process performed by the effect control board is ended.

(Sub control board communication processing)
Next, the sub control board communication process performed by the process of step S501 of FIG. 104 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a sub-control board communication processing subroutine.

(Step S501-1)
In step S501-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for determining whether or not a different command is received. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the command transmitted from the sub control board 400 is a command different from the command transmitted last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S501-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S501). -1 = No), the sub-control board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process in the effect control board.

(Step S501-2)
In step S501-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs sub-side control command analysis processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 executes processing when a command different from the previously transmitted command is received. When the process of step S501-2 is completed, the sub-side control board communication process subroutine is ended, and the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process in the effect control board.

(Sub-side control command analysis processing)
Next, the sub-side control command analysis process performed by the process of step S501-2 of FIG. 105 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a subroutine of sub-side control command analysis processing.

(Step S501-2-1)
In step S501-2-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not a transmission order information command has been received. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the sub-control board 400 is a transmission order information command. If it is determined that the received command is a transmission order information command (step S501-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2-2, where the received command is a transmission order information command. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S501-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S501-2-3.

(Step S501-2-2)
In step S501-2-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for storing transmission order information. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores the transmission order information of the command indicated by the received transmission order information command in the command transmission order information storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. For example, when the transmission order information of the command indicated by the received transmission order information command is transmission order pattern 1 (see FIG. 116), the liquid crystal control CPU 601 divides the sub-control board 400 into a plurality of times (32 times). It is recognized that the transmission order of the checksum command to be transmitted is “ascending order”. Then, when the process of step S501-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S501-2-10.

(Step S501-2-3)
In step S501-2-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not a checksum command has been received. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the sub control board 400 is a checksum command. If it is determined that the received command is a checksum command (step S501-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2-4, and the received command is a transmission order information command. If it is determined that there is not (step S501-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S501-2-7.

(Step S501-2-4)
In step S501-2-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of storing the reception order. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores the reception order in the command reception order information storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603 based on the received checksum command. For example, when the transmission order indicated by the transmission order information is “ascending order” and the received checksum command is the command 20, the command is recognized as the 20th command (see FIG. 116). When the transmission order indicated by the transmission order information is “descending order”, for example, the reception order for the command 32 is “1” (see FIG. 116), and the reception order for the command 31 is “2” (see FIG. 116). ), The reception order for the command 1 can be stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 602 in the form of “32” (see FIG. 116) and the correspondence between the command and the reception order. Similarly, when the transmission order is “random”, for example, in the case of the command 20, the information in which the reception order is associated with the command in the form of “32” (see FIG. 116), the reception order is It can also be stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 602. Then, when the process of step S501-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S501-2-5.

(Step S501-2-5)
In step S501-2-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of reception of the checksum command satisfies a predetermined number. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for determining whether or not the checksum command received from the sub control board 400 has reached 32 times. If it is determined that the received checksum command has reached the predetermined number of times 32 (step S501-2-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2-6, and the received checksum command When it is determined that the sum command has not reached the predetermined number of times 32 (step S501-2-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S501-2-10.

(Step S501-2-6)
In step S501-2-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs timer setting processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 sets a timer for confirming reception of an end command 1 and an end command 2, which will be described later, based on receiving the checksum command 32 times. In addition, as setting time, 30 minutes etc. are assumed, for example. Then, when the process of step S501-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S501-2-10.

  In addition, the time to set is not restricted to 30 minutes described above, Various time is assumed. For example, if the set time is shortened, it is necessary to receive an end command 1 or an end command 2 to be described later within the short time, so that security can be further improved. In order to shorten the set time, after finishing the process of step S501-2-6, the sub-side control board is not transferred to the verification process in the effect control board in step S501-2-10 described later. It is conceivable to terminate the command analysis subroutine. The reason for configuring in this way is that, after setting a short time as the timer to be set in step S501-2-6, the process proceeds to the verification process in the effect control board in step S501-2-10. In the process of step S501-2-10-2 described later in the verification process, it is determined that the timer set time has elapsed. In this case, since the end command 1 or the end command 2 has not yet been received, it is determined in step S501-2-10-8 described later that the end command is not stored, resulting in an error. Because. Therefore, after the process of step S501-2-6 is completed depending on the set time, whether to shift to step S501-2-10 or to terminate the sub-control board command analysis process subroutine appropriately. Can be considered.

(Step S501-2-7)
In step S501-2-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the end command 1 has been received. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the sub control board 400 is the end command 1. If it is determined that the received command is the end command 1 (step S501-2-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2-8, and the received command is not the end command 1. (Step S501-2-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S501-2-9.

(Step S501-2-8)
In step S501-2-8, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of storing the reception information of the end command 1. Specifically, when the end command 1 is received, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for storing the reception information of the end command 1 received in the end command 1 storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S501-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S501-2-10.

(Step S501-2-9)
In step S501-2-9, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for storing reception information of the end command 2. Specifically, when the end command 2 is received, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of storing the reception information of the end command 2 received in the end command 2 storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S501-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S501-2-10.

(Step S501-2-10)
In step S501-2-10, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs collation processing on the effect control board, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 checks the checksum value transmitted from the sub control board 400 (the sum value calculated based on the control data of the sub ROM 402) and the collation stored in advance in the effect control board 600. A process for collating the sum value, a process for collating whether checksum commands transmitted in 32 steps are received in order, a process for collating whether end command reception information is stored, Before the timer elapses, a process for checking whether or not the end command 1 or the end command 2 is received is executed. Then, when the process of step S501-2-10 ends, the sub-side control command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process in the effect control board.

(Verification processing on production control board)
Next, based on FIG. 107, the collation process in the effect control board performed by the process of step S501-2-10 in FIG. 106 will be described. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a subroutine for collation processing in the effect control board.

(Step S501-2-10-1)
In step S501-2-10-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the timer has been set. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the timer is set in the process of step S501-2-6 in FIG. If it is determined that the timer has been set (step S501-2-10-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2-10-2, and it is determined that the timer has not been set. If it has been done (step S501-2-10-1 = No), the verification process subroutine on the effect control board is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process on the effect control board.

(Step S501-2-10-2)
In step S501-2-10-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the timer set time has elapsed. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether or not the timer set in the process of step S501-2-6 in FIG. 106 has elapsed (for example, whether the timer counter indicates “0”) or not. I do. If it is determined that the timer has elapsed (step S501-2-10-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2-10-3, and it is determined that the timer has not elapsed. If it has been performed (step S501-2-10-2 = No), the verification process subroutine in the effect control board is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process in the effect control board.

(Step S501-2-10-3)
In step S501-2-10-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for reading collation information. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for reading the collation information stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 602. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 collates with the check sum value (sum value calculated based on the control data of the sub ROM 402) transmitted from the sub control board 400 and collates stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 602. Processing to read out information is performed. As the collation information, data similar to the data stored in the sub ROM 402 shown in FIG. 115 is stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 602 and collated with the checksum value transmitted from the sub control board 400. It is composed. For example, as shown in FIG. 115, the total sum value “630” is stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 602 as collation information, and the checksum value transmitted from the sub-control board 400 is “630”. It is configured to determine whether or not. The verification information may be stored in the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S501-2-10-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S501-2-10-4.

(Step S501-2-10-4)
In step S501-2-10-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the received checksum value matches the collation information. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs the check sum value (sum value calculated based on the control data of the sub ROM 402) transmitted from the sub control board 400 and the processing in step S501-2-10-3. Processing is performed to determine whether or not the read collation information matches. If it is determined that the checksum value matches the collation information (step S501-2-10-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2-10-6 to check the checksum value. When it is determined that the verification information does not match (step S501-2-10-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S501-2-10-5.

(Step S501-2-10-5)
In step S501-2-10-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of turning on an error notification flag. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 sets an error notification flag so as to notify the error that the checksum value transmitted from the sub-control board 400 and the verification information stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 602 do not match. Process to turn on. The error notification is assumed to be performed using the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, when the process of step S501-2-10-5 is completed, the verification process subroutine in the effect control board is ended, and the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process in the effect control board.

(Step S501-2-10-6)
In step S501-2-10-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not checksum commands are received in order. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the checksum command transmitted from the sub-control board 400 is received in the order defined in FIG. If it is determined that the checksum commands are received in order (step S501-2-10-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2-10-8, and the checksum commands are processed in order. If it is determined that it has not been received normally (step S501-2-10-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S501-2-10-7.

(Step S501-2-10-7)
In step S501-2-10-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for turning on an error notification flag. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of turning on an error notification flag so as to notify an error that the commands are not transmitted in the command transmission order defined in FIG. The error notification is assumed to be performed using the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, when the process of step S501-2-10-7 is completed, the verification process subroutine on the effect control board is ended, and the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process on the effect control board.

  As described above, by monitoring the checksum command transmission order as well, if an unauthorized person performs a fraud that alters the checksum value, not only the sum value is matched, but also the command transmission order is matched. It is necessary to let Therefore, it is difficult to perform fraud, and security can be further increased.

(Step S501-2-10-8)
In step S501-2-10-8, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the end command reception information has been stored. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for determining whether or not the end command reception information is stored in the end command 1 storage area or the end command 2 storage area. If it is determined that the end command reception information is stored (step S501-2-10-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S501-2-10-10, and the end command reception information is stored. If it is determined that it is not stored (step S501-2-10-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S501-2-10-9.

(Step S501-2-10-9)
In step S501-2-10-9, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of turning on an error notification flag. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of turning on the error notification flag so as to notify the error that the end command has not been received. The error notification is assumed to be performed using the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, when the process of step S501-2-10-9 is completed, the verification process subroutine on the effect control board is ended, and the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process on the effect control board.

(Step S501-2-10-10)
In step S501-2-10-10, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the end command 1 is received before the timer elapses. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the end command 1 is received before the timer set based on the reception of the 32nd command of the checksum command has elapsed. Do. If it is determined that the end command 1 has been received before the timer elapses (step S501-2-10-10 = Yes), the verification processing subroutine on the effect control board is ended, When the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process on the control board and it is determined that the end command 1 has not been received (step S501-2-10-10 = No), step S501-2-10-11 The process is transferred to.

(Step S501-2-10-11)
In step S501-2-10-11, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the end command 2 is received before the timer elapses. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether or not the end command 2 has been received before the timer set based on the reception of the 32nd command of the checksum command has elapsed. Do. If it is determined that the end command 2 is received before the timer elapses (step S501-2-10-11 = Yes), the verification processing subroutine on the effect control board is ended, When the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process on the control board and it is determined that the end command 2 has not been received (step S501-2-10-11 = No), step S501-2-10-12 The process is transferred to.

  In the present embodiment, if the end command 1 or the end command 2 is received before the timer elapses, the error notification by the end command reception is not performed. For example, if one end command is configured, if an error (an event in which a command cannot be transmitted / received) occurs during command transmission / reception, it is immediately determined that an error has occurred, resulting in frequent errors. It can be connected. In this case, the confirmation work by the manager of the gaming machine is increased. Therefore, if either the end command 1 or the end command 2 is received within the set timer time, it is determined that the state is “normal”, so that errors frequently occur, and confirmation by the administrator of the gaming machine Is prevented from increasing.

(Step S501-2-10-12)
In step S501-2-10-12, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of turning on an error notification flag. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for turning on the error notification flag so as to notify the error that the end command 1 or the end command 2 has not been received before the timer elapses. The error notification is assumed to be performed using the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, when the process of step S501-2-10-12 is completed, the verification process subroutine in the effect control board is ended, and the process proceeds to step S502 of the main process in the effect control board.

(Conceptual diagram of cumulative checksum)
Here, an outline of the cumulative checksum in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113.

  First, the example shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 113A is a conventional example, and the example shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 113B is an example of this embodiment. 112 and 113 show the first game, the second game, and the third game after the setting of the gaming machine is changed.

  112A, in the first game, the sum value calculated for the control command set on the main control board 300 is “100”, and information sent to the sub-control board 400 includes a control command, The sum value “100” is transmitted. The sum value calculated based on the control command received by the sub-control board 400 is “100”. In the first game, the present embodiment shown in (b) has the same configuration, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  112 (a), in the second game, the sum value calculated for the control command set on the main control board 300 is “120”, and information sent to the sub-control board 400 includes a control command, The sum value “120” is transmitted. Then, the sum value calculated based on the control command received by the sub-control board 400 is “120”.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 112B, in the second game, the sum value calculated for the control command set on the main control board 300 is “120”, and information sent to the sub-control board 400 includes the control command. Then, the sum value “220” is transmitted. The thumb value “220” is a value obtained by adding the thumb value “120” of the second game to the thumb value “100” of the first game. The sum value calculated based on the control command received by the sub-control board 400 is “120”, and the sum value added to the sum value “100” of the first game is “220”.

  112A, in the third game, the sum value calculated for the control command set on the main control board 300 is “100”, and information sent to the sub-control board 400 includes a control command, The sum value “100” is transmitted. The sum value calculated based on the control command received by the sub-control board 400 is “100”.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 112 (b), in the third game, the sum value calculated for the control command set on the main control board 300 is “100”, and information sent to the sub-control board 400 includes the control command. Then, the sum value “320” is transmitted. This thumb value “320” is a value obtained by adding the thumb value “100” of the third game to the thumb value “100” of the first game and the thumb value “120” of the second game. Then, the sum value calculated based on the control command received by the sub-control board 400 becomes “100”, and is added to the sum value “100” of the first game and the sum value “120” of the second game. The thumb value is “320”.

  In the conventional example configured in this way and this embodiment, an example in which an illegal command is injected between the first game and the second game using an illegal command transmitter or the like in FIG. 113 will be described. To do.

  In the conventional example shown in FIG. 113 (a), the sum value is simply calculated and collated based on the control command in each unit game. For example, even if an invalid command is injected between games. It is difficult to discover that an illegal command has been injected by checking the sum value. On the other hand, in (b) of the present embodiment, especially in the second game, the sum value is stored by adding to the sum value up to the previous time (first game). Even if a command is injected, the sum value of the illegal command is added on the sub-control board 400 side. In other words, as shown in the second game, if an illegal command is injected between the first game and the second game, if the sum value of the illegal command is “5”, at the end of the second game The sum of the sum values stored in the sub-control board 400 is “225”, which is inconsistent with the sum value “220” transmitted from the main control board 300. In the example of this embodiment, Even when an illegal command injection is performed between games or the like, an illegal command injection can be noticed.

  As a method for storing the accumulated checksum value, the following method is given as an example. In the present embodiment, the value of the cumulative checksum is cleared by changing the setting value. Therefore, from the start of daily business at the amusement store to the end of business, The accumulated checksum value is not cleared in principle. For this reason, it is conceivable that the value to be stored becomes large. For example, when the value is stored from “0” and the value exceeds “65535”, the value is stored again from “0”. Is mentioned. With this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of areas for storing the accumulated checksum value.

(Conceptual diagram showing different checksum values for each game machine)
Here, an outline of the checksum value that is different for each gaming machine in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in FIG. 114, the gaming machine A and the gaming machine B are of the same model, and based on the case where the commands determined in the unit game are exactly the same in the gaming machine A and the gaming machine B, Give an explanation.

  In FIG. 114, since the command from the set value designation command to the game medal payout end command of the command determined in the unit game is the same in the gaming table A and the gaming table B, the calculation is performed for the command. The same sum value is also used. This value is represented as “1734” as a subtotal of the value not including the main chip code in both the gaming table A and the gaming table B. In this embodiment, the sum value is calculated for the main chip codes 1 to 5 as well. Since the main chip code is a code determined based on a main chip ID composed of a unique serial number, the sum value calculated for the main chip code is also a unique value.

  For example, when the sum value is obtained without including the main chip code, the sum value of both the gaming table A and the gaming table B is “1734”. In this case, if a fraudulent person purchases the same model as the gaming machine A and the gaming machine B in the used machine market of the gaming machine and analyzes the thumb value, the gaming machine A, the gaming machine If the table B is still installed in an amusement store, there is a risk that fraud will not be detected by the sum value if fraud is performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sum value is calculated for the main chip code, which is determined based on the main chip ID composed of a unique serial number. A unique thumb value can be generated on the platform. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 114, the gaming table A has a thumb value “1915” and the gaming table B has a thumb value “1901”. In this case, even if a fraudster purchases the same model and analyzes the sum value, the analysis result can be reflected only on the gaming machine where the analysis is performed, and is the same as the gaming machine that was tentatively analyzed. Even if the model is installed in the amusement store, it can be connected to prevention of fraud.

The present embodiment has the following effects.
(1) In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 transmits a game information command in a unit game to the sub CPU 401. Then, the main CPU 301 calculates an inspection value (checksum value) for the game information command, and cumulatively stores the calculated inspection value over a plurality of unit games. Further, the main CPU 301 is configured to transmit the inspection value (check sum value) accumulated and stored to the sub CPU 401. On the other hand, the sub CPU 401 calculates an inspection value (checksum value) based on the received command, and accumulates the calculated inspection value over a plurality of unit games. Then, the sub CPU 401 collates the inspection value stored cumulatively transmitted from the main CPU 301 with the inspection value accumulatively stored in the sub RAM 403. Was judged as an error. Therefore, the inspection value calculated in the previous game is added to the inspection value calculated in the previous game, and the added value is collated. The command that is transmitted after the command is transmitted until the command is transmitted in the current game can also be added. For this reason, when an illegal command is transmitted between games, there is a difference between the value accumulated and stored in the main CPU 301 and the value accumulated and stored in the sub CPU 401. Can be connected. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts that attempt to obtain an unfair advantage by sending an illegal command.

  (2) In this embodiment, the ID of the main chip mounted on the main control board 300 is stored in the sub RAM 403, and main chip ID information is transmitted from the main CPU 301 to the sub CPU 401 for each unit game. Thus, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the main chip ID information transmitted from the main CPU 301 matches the main chip ID information stored in the sub RAM 403. Then, the sub CPU 401 determines that an error has occurred when the main chip ID information does not match. Therefore, when the main control board 300 itself is replaced with an unauthorized board or the main chip is replaced with an unauthorized main chip, the sub CPU 401 can determine that an error has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to detect when there is a possibility that the control device (main control board 300 or the like) has been cheated.

  (3) In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 calculates a check value (checksum value) for a game information command in a unit game, and checks a specific main chip ID. Value (checksum value) was calculated. Since the main chip ID is composed of a unique serial number, the calculated inspection value is also a unique value. Therefore, even for the same model, the value for inspection can be made different (a unique value for inspection is generated by calculating a unique ID as a target). Therefore, even if an unauthorized person obtains a game machine (model A) in the used machine market and analyzes the value for inspection, the model A in other game machines is used for inspection due to the difference in main chip ID. Therefore, it is difficult to apply the analysis result to the model A in other game machines. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game stand that can withstand fraud.

  (4) In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 401 calculates an inspection value for the game control data stored in the sub ROM 402 and transmits it to the effect control board 600. I made it. In addition, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600 determines whether or not the inspection value transmitted from the sub CPU 401 matches the verification data stored in the liquid crystal control ROM. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that an error has occurred when the value for inspection does not match the data for verification. Therefore, it is possible to detect when there is a possibility that the control device (the sub control board 400 or the like) has been cheated. In recent gaming machines (especially slot machines), the mainstream is to display a symbol combination related to the winning combination by navigating the stop operation sequence of the winning combination on the sub-control board. . Accordingly, since the sub control board 400 is greatly related to the profit of the player, it is necessary to strengthen fraud countermeasures against the sub control board 400. Under such circumstances, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the game control data in the sub ROM 402 (for example, the table related to the number of additional games in the ART game) is replaced with unauthorized game control data, the power is turned on. Since the values for inspection differ from time to time, it is possible to enhance against illegal acts such as rewriting the game control data in the sub ROM 402.

  (5) In the present embodiment, the first inspection value and the second inspection value are initialized based on the setting value of the gaming machine being set by the administrator of the gaming machine. . Therefore, an error that occurs when the first inspection value and the second inspection value do not match can be canceled by changing the set value.

  (6) In the present embodiment, the inspection value is collated for each unit game. Therefore, security can be further strengthened.

  (7) In the present embodiment, the ID information of the main chip is collated for each unit game. Therefore, security can be further strengthened.

  (8) Further, in the present embodiment, the ID information of the main chip used for verification stored in the storage area is configured to be changed by changing the setting value of the gaming machine. Therefore, even if illegal verification data or the like is stored, it can be replaced by changing the set value.

  (9) Further, in the present embodiment, after transmitting the test value related to the game control data calculated at the time of power-on, a confirmation end command is further transmitted. Therefore, when the end command is not received, it is possible to make an error determination, so that it is possible to give a wide range of security enhancement.

(Second Embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the basic configuration of the gaming machine is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description of the basic configuration of the gaming machine is omitted.

  In the second embodiment, game history information, error information, and main control of a gaming machine are performed using a mobile linked game in which a mobile phone held by a player is linked to a gaming machine. Information including the ID information of the main chip mounted on the substrate 300 is transmitted to the server on the manager side.

  First, the mobile-linked game is a game system in which the gaming machine 1 and a mobile phone are linked to provide special contents to a player. In this gaming system, a game for a player currently playing on the gaming machine 1 Based on game histories related to various game processes executed from the start to the end of the game, the player can acquire special image data, audio data, etc., thereby increasing the player's willingness to play. It is a game that is.

  Next, the configuration of each control unit will be described.

(Direction button 21, cross key 22)
The effect button 21 and the cross key 22 are configured as operation means for the player to operate when starting and ending the mobile linked game.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is configured as an address storage unit that stores an Internet address for accessing an external information processing apparatus.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is configured as a permission unit that permits the start of the mobile linked game on condition that the password input via the effect button 21 and the cross key 22 is authenticated.

  Further, when the creation instruction information is input by the player operating the effect button 21 and the cross key 22, the sub CPU 401 sets the game history information stored in the sub RAM 403, the Internet site to the external information processing apparatus. Various information such as homepage address for accessing via the terminal, terminal-specific information of the player's mobile or fixed terminal, game end time, error information stored in the sub-RAM 403, main chip ID information stored in the sub-RAM 403, etc. Is generated as generating means for generating two-dimensional barcode information. The generated two-dimensional barcode information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board. The two-dimensional barcode information may be generated on the sub control board side (for example, the sub CPU 401), or information necessary for generation may be transmitted from the sub control board side to generate the effect control board side (for example, Or the liquid crystal control CPU 601).

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub-RAM 403 is configured as a game history information storage unit that stores game history information from when a player starts a game to when the game ends, based on the fact that the start of the mobile linked game is permitted. The stored game history information includes, for example, game history information in which a player has generated a specific effect in a game, game history information in which a specific task effect has been achieved, and the like.

  The sub RAM 403 is configured as error information storage means for storing error information when an error occurs in the gaming machine. For example, when a selector error occurs in the gaming machine, selector error information is stored in the sub RAM 403.

  The sub RAM 403 is configured as an ID information storage unit that stores ID information of the main chip mounted on the main control board 300. Note that the ID information of the main chip stored in the sub RAM 403 is stored when the setting of the gaming machine is changed, as in the first embodiment.

(Mobile linked game start process when password is not acquired)
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the mobile linked game start process (when no password is acquired) will be described. Note that the mobile linked game start processing is based on, for example, detecting that the effect button 21 and the cross key 22 are operated in the various switch detection processing in step S306 of the main processing in the sub-control board in FIG. Processing begins. This process is a process performed by the sub CPU 401.

(Step S306-1)
In step S306-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a password output request. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether there is a password output request based on an input from the panel LED relay board 700. For example, when a mobile-linked game is performed for the first time, the player outputs a two-dimensional code for performing password output using the effect button 21, the cross key 22, and the like. The player can acquire the password by photographing the output two-dimensional code with a mobile phone with a camera and accessing the Internet site from the photographed two-dimensional code. If it is determined that there is a password output request (step S306-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S306-2. If it is determined that there is no password output request (step S306-1). = No), the mobile linked game start process when the password is not acquired is terminated.

(Step S306-2)
In step S306-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for generating two-dimensional code information. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 reads information on the address of the Internet site for allowing the player to obtain a password from the sub ROM 402, and performs information generation processing for two-dimensionally coding the address information. Then, when the process of step S306-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S306-3.

(Step S306-3)
In step S306-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a two-dimensional code information display data command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting a two-dimensional code information display data command so that the liquid crystal display device 46 displays the two-dimensional code information generated in step S306-2. And if the process of step S306-3 is complete | finished, the portable interlocking | linkage game start process at the time of password unacquisition will be complete | finished.

  Note that, by performing the processing from step S306-1 to step S306-3, for example, a display screen as shown in FIG. 121 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. For example, when the player makes a password output request by operating the effect button 21, the cross key 22, and the like, the display contents shown in FIG. 121 (a) are displayed. At this time, the player makes a password output request by, for example, operating the effect button 21 by moving the cursor using the left and right keys of the cross key 22, for example. Further, after a password output request is made, the display content shown in FIG. 121 (b) is obtained. At this time, the player uses a mobile phone held by the player to photograph the two-dimensional code shown in FIG. 121 (b), and accesses the Internet site based on the information, so that the mobile link You can get the password you need for the game.

(Mobile-linked game start processing at the time of password acquisition)
Next, the mobile linked game start process (when the password has been acquired) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the mobile linked game start processing is based on, for example, detecting that the effect button 21 and the cross key 22 are operated in the various switch detection processing in step S306 of the main processing in the sub-control board in FIG. Processing begins. This process is a process performed by the sub CPU 401. Note that the process for inputting the password is performed by, for example, starting the menu screen using the effect button 21, the cross key 22, and the like from the menu screen while the game machine 1 is not playing a game. This is done by selecting a password entry item for starting the game.

(Step S306-4)
In step S <b> 306-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a password input. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a password input based on the input from the panel LED relay board 700. For example, when starting the game, the player uses the effect button 21, the cross key 22, and the like to input a password. If it is determined that there is a password input (step S306-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S306-5. If it is determined that there is no password input (step S306-4 = No). ), The mobile linked game start process when the password has been acquired is terminated. Note that when there is a password input, the player already has a password, and therefore, at least in a previously played game, the password is output.

(Step S306-5)
In step S306-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for authenticating a password. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for authenticating whether the input password is a registered password. When the process of step S306-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S306-6.

(Step S306-6)
In step S306-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the password authentication is successful. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the password has been successfully authenticated as a result of performing the authentication process in the process of step S306-5. If it is determined that the password authentication is successful (step S306-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S306-7, and if it is determined that the password authentication is not successful ( Step S306-6 = No), the mobile linked game start process when the password has been acquired is terminated.

(Step S306-7)
In step S306-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a mobile linked game start process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the game information corresponding to the password and starts the mobile linked game based on the determination that the password authentication is successful in the process of step S306-6. I do. Then, when the process of step S306-7 is finished, the mobile linked game start process when the password has been obtained is finished.

  Note that, by performing the processing from step S306-4 to step S306-7, for example, a display screen as shown in FIG. 122 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. For example, when the player inputs the password by operating the effect button 21, the cross key 22, and the like, the display contents shown in FIG. 122 (a) are obtained. At this time, for example, the player moves the cursor onto the corresponding alphabet using the left and right keys of the cross key 22, and operates the effect button 21, for example, to input the password. If the password is input and the password authentication is successful, the display contents shown in FIG. 122B are displayed.

(Mobile linked game end processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the mobile linked game end process will be described. Note that the mobile linked game end process is based on, for example, detecting that the effect button 21 and the cross key 22 are operated in the various switch detection process in step S306 of the main process in the sub-control board in FIG. Processing begins. This process is a process performed by the sub CPU 401. In addition, the mobile linked game end processing is performed by, for example, starting the menu screen using the effect button 21, the cross key 22, or the like while the gaming machine 1 is not playing a game, and starting the mobile linked game from the menu screen. This is done by selecting an item indicating the end of the game.

(Step S306-8)
In step S306-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a two-dimensional code generation instruction input. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a two-dimensional code generation instruction input based on the input from the panel LED relay board 700. For example, when the player ends the game, the player inputs a two-dimensional code generation instruction using the effect button 21, the cross key 22, and the like. When it is determined that there is a two-dimensional code generation instruction input (step S306-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S306-9, and when it is determined that there is no two-dimensional code generation instruction input. (Step S306-8 = No), the mobile linked game end processing is ended.

(Step S306-9)
In step S306-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for acquiring an end time. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of acquiring the current time as the end time of the mobile linked game based on the determination in step S306-8 that there is a two-dimensional code generation instruction input. Do. Then, when the process of step S306-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S306-10.

(Step S306-10)
In step S306-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for acquiring game history information. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of acquiring game history information stored in the game history information storage unit from the start of the mobile linked game to the end of the mobile linked game. Then, when the process of step S306-10 is completed, the process proceeds to step S306-11.

(Step S306-11)
In step S306-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for acquiring error information. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for acquiring error information generated in the gaming machine 1 and stored in the error information storage unit. Note that the error information may be cleared from the error information storage means after being acquired in the process of step S306-11. Then, when the process of step S306-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S306-12.

(Step S306-12)
In step S306-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for acquiring main chip ID information. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for acquiring the ID information of the main chip stored in the ID information storage unit. When the process of step S306-12 is completed, the process proceeds to step S306-13.

(Step S306-13)
In step S306-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a two-dimensional code information generation process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the game-related information configured by the game history information in step S306-10, the error information in step S306-11, and the main chip ID information in step S306-12. Performs processing to generate dimension code information. Then, when the process of step S306-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S306-14. If no error has occurred in the gaming machine 1 and no error information is stored in the error information storage means, information indicating no error in step S306-11, and game history information in step S306-10 The two-dimensional code information is generated based on the game related information configured with the main chip ID information in step S306-12. If error information is not stored in the error storage means, the error information is not included, and the two-dimensional code information is based on game-related information including game history information and main chip ID information. It may be generated. Further, when the two-dimensional code information is generated, it can be generated including the start time of the mobile linked game and the end time of the mobile linked game.

(Step S306-14)
In step S306-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a two-dimensional code information display data command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting a two-dimensional code information display data command in order to display the two-dimensional code information generated in step S306-13 on the liquid crystal display device 46. And if the process of step S306-3 is complete | finished, a portable interlocking | linkage game completion | finish process will be complete | finished.

  In addition, by performing the processing from step S306-8 to step S306-14, for example, a display screen as shown in FIG. 123 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. For example, when the player inputs a two-dimensional code generation instruction by operating the effect button 21, the cross key 22, and the like, the display contents shown in FIG. At this time, the player moves the cursor using the left and right keys of the cross key 22, for example, and operates the ENTER key to input a two-dimensional code generation instruction. When there is a two-dimensional code generation instruction input, the display content shown in FIG. At this time, the player can continue the game in the next game by shooting the two-dimensional code shown in FIG. 123 (b) using the mobile phone held by the player. become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a game system in the mobile linked game will be described.

  The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a gaming machine 1 and an information processing apparatus (hereinafter referred to as a server 1000) capable of storing game-related information, so that a mobile phone can communicate with the server 1000 via a public line (Internet 410). It is connected.

  The mobile phone is a portable terminal device with a camera that can access an Internet site, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 of the gaming machine 1 is photographed and read by the camera, and the game included in the read two-dimensional code. The related information can be transmitted to the server 1000. As described above, the game-related information is game-related information including game history information, error information, and main chip ID information, game history information, and game including main chip ID information. Related information exists.

  The server 1000 includes a Web server 1001, an application server 1002, and a database server 1003. The Web server 1001 has a function of performing transmission / reception of information via a mobile phone and the Internet 410, and displaying information such as introduction of a mobile linked game system on a mobile phone screen.

  The application server 1002 has functions of generating start password information for causing the gaming machine 1 to start a mobile linked game, authenticating whether or not to store game-related information received from a mobile phone, and the like.

  The database server 1003 has a function of storing game history information, error information, and main chip ID information received from a mobile phone via the Internet 410.

  According to such a gaming system, for example, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), if the manager's server stores the shipping destination game store information corresponding to the main chip ID in advance, the game What kind of error occurs in which game stand in which game store by game related information composed of game history information, error information, and main chip ID information sent in the system Information can be acquired. Of course, even in the conventional technology, it was possible to collect information about what kind of error occurred in which game stand in which game store, but for example, after recording by the game store, etc. Since the information is managed by sending it to the manufacturer, the information management is complicated. However, according to the present embodiment, since information necessary for information management can be collected using the mobile linked game, information management can be performed without requiring complicated processing.

  In addition, a person who conducts fraud is likely not to play a mobile linked game. However, when a player who does not cheat performs a mobile linked game after storing error information, the player It is possible to transfer the information including the stored error information in the information transfer by the mobile linked game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably transfer error information generated by a fraudulent person who attempted fraud to the administrator.

The present embodiment has the following effects.
(1) In this embodiment, based on the operation means being operated, the error information in the gaming machine 1 and the ID information of the main chip mounted on the main control board 300 and the like are output to the outside of the gaming machine. I tried to do it. Therefore, it becomes easy for the administrator of the gaming machine 1 to manage information regarding what kind of error has occurred in which gaming machine. Therefore, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can easily manage information indicating that there is a possibility that fraud has been performed.

  (2) Further, in the present embodiment, a two-dimensional code based on game history information, error information, and main chip ID information in accordance with the transfer of game history information in the mobile linked game to the administrator server And the above information is transferred to the administrator server via the player's take-in operation, etc., so that it is not necessary to use a dedicated command or the like for output to the outside of the gaming machine. Output to the outside is possible. Therefore, the control load on the control means can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 constitute the symbol display means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control board 400 constitutes the game control means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the sub RAM 403 that receives the main chip ID from the main control board 300 and stores the main chip ID constitutes the unique individual information storage unit of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main chip ID configured with a unique serial number constitutes the unique individual information of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 and the sub CPU 401 constitute error detection means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the sub RAM 403 constitutes error information storage means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 21 and the cross key 22 constitute the operation means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 constitutes game related information output means.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 constitutes code information generating means for generating a two-dimensional code.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control board 600 and the liquid crystal display device 46 constitute code information display means for displaying a two-dimensional code.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a spinning machine (slot machine) has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a pachinko gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, or an arrangement ball gaming machine.

1 gaming machine 2 cabinet 3 front door 4 hinge mechanism 5 key hole 6 medal slot 7 BET button 7sw BET switch 8 MAXBET button 8sw MAXBET switch 9 settlement button 9sw settlement switch 10 start lever 10sw start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 Middle stop button 12sw Middle stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Return button 15 Selector 15s Selector sensor 16s Error release sensor 17s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Production button 22 Cross key 23 Display window 24 Start lamp 25 1st BET lamp 26 2nd BET lamp 27 3rd BET lamp 28 Stored number display device 29 Discharged number display device 30 Allowable display lamp 31 Replay display Amplifier 32 Bonus display unit 33 ART display unit 34 RUSH display unit 35 stop button operation display unit 35L left stop button operation display section 35C in the stop button operation display unit 35R right stop button operation display unit 36 start lever LED
37 Waist panel 38 Receptacle unit 39 Medal payout opening 40 Upper left speaker 41 Lower left speaker 42 Upper right speaker 43 Lower right speaker 44 Setting display section 45 Setting change button 45sw Setting change switch 46 Liquid crystal display device 47 External concentration terminal board 48 Setting change Key hole 49sw Setting change key switch 50 Production device 51 Base portion 52 Handle portion 53 Sheath portion 100 Status board 150 Reel control board 151 Left stepping motor 152 Middle stepping motor 153 Right stepping motor 154s Left reel sensor 155s Middle reel sensor 156s Right reel sensor 200 power board 201 power button 201sw power switch 202 hopper 203 auxiliary storage 203s auxiliary storage sensor 204 discharge slit 205 hopper guide member 206 guide member 07 dispensing guide member 250 set the switch board 300 the main control board 301 the main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Main random number generator 400 Sub control board 401 Sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 Sub RAM
404 Sub-random number generator 410 Internet 450 Backlight relay board 451 Left backlight board 452 Middle backlight board 453 Right backlight board 461 Left backlight 462 Middle backlight 463 Right backlight 500 Amplifier board 600 Production control board 601 Liquid crystal control CPU
602 LCD control ROM
603 Liquid crystal control RAM
604 CGROM
605 Sound source IC
606 Sound source ROM
650 effect device drive board 651 left effect device motor 652s upper left effect device sensor 653s lower left effect device sensor 654 right effect device motor 655s upper right effect device sensor 656s lower right effect device sensor 657s left liquid crystal lift motor 658s left upper liquid crystal lift sensor 659s lower left liquid crystal lift Sensor 660 Right liquid crystal lift motor 661s Upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s Lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 700 Panel LED relay board 701 MAXBET button LED board 702 Stop button LED board 703 Production button LED board 704 Lumbar panel LED board 705 Bonus display LED board 706 ART display LED board 707 RUSH display LED board 708 Stop button operation LED board 709 Start lever LED board 710 Effect button sensor 711 Cross key board 72 1 MAXBET button LED
722 Stop button LED
722L Left stop button LED
722C Middle stop button LED
722R Right stop button LED
723 Production Button LED
724 Lumbar panel LED
750 Production device drive relay board 800 Production device control board 801 Upper left production apparatus board 802 Lower left production apparatus board 803 Upper right production apparatus board 804 Lower right production apparatus board 811 Upper left production apparatus 812 Left lower production apparatus 813 Upper right production apparatus 814 Lower right production apparatus 850 LED control board 851 Top LED board 852 Corner LED board 853 Side LED board 854 Receptacle side LED board 855 Receptacle LED board 861 Corner LED
862 Top LED
863 Side LED
864 saucer side LED
865 Receptacle LED
1000 Server 1001 Web server 1002 Application server 1003 Database server

In order to solve such problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention is advantageous to the player based on the fact that a specific display result is displayed on the symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols. In a gaming machine that shifts to an advantageous gaming state, game control means for controlling a game, unique individual information storage means for storing unique individual information defined in the game control means, error detection means for detecting an error, and Error information storage means for storing the error detected by the error detection means as error information, operation means for receiving a predetermined operation, game history information storage means for storing game history information indicating the history of the game, and the operation Means for permitting the start of a game linked to a predetermined terminal by performing an operation indicating a game start; After the start of the game linked with the predetermined terminal is permitted, when the game linked with the predetermined terminal is being performed, an operation indicating the end of the game is performed in the operation means, Based on the game history information stored in the game history information storage means, code information generation means for generating code information readable by the predetermined terminal, and the code information generation means generated by the code information generation means Code information display means for displaying code information, and the code information generation means, when generating the code information, the unique individual information stored in the unique individual information storage means, and the error information storage The code information is generated including the error information stored in the means .

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that shifts to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player based on the fact that a specific display result is displayed on the symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols,
Game control means for controlling the game;
Unique individual information storage means for storing unique individual information defined in the game control means;
An error detection means for detecting an error;
Error information storage means for storing the error detected by the error detection means as error information;
An operation means for receiving a predetermined operation;
Based on the operation of the operation means, game related information based on the error information stored in the error information storage means and the unique individual information stored in the unique individual information storage means Game related information output means for outputting to the outside of the machine;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: